Digital Copier

d-Copia 1800MF d-Copia 2200MF
SERVICE MANUAL
Code Y111000-1

PUBLICATION ISSUED BY: Olivetti S.p.A. 77, Via Jervis - 10015 Ivrea (TO) Italy Copyright © 2009, Olivetti All rights reserved

This page is intentionally left blank.

Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities.

Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol. CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol. General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol. General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol. General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

......................... causing injury...... • Do not install the copier near a radiator.................... other heat source or near flammable material................ .................... Protect the eyes.......... ..Installation Precautions WARNING • Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified....................... • Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped........................ This may cause fire.. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock..... lightning rods...... Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance..... rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention................................. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock.................................. CAUTION: • Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over................. leading to injury......... drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately........... When using an extension cable..... This may cause fire or electric shock... always check that it is adequate for the rated current..................... Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes.................. • Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively......... ..................................................... • Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s instruction handbook.. ......... Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock.. .....................1..................... • Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point................ ............. • Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it......... .... .. If it gets into the eyes....................................... ........ .................. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested............ ..................................................... ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities............................................... • Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible.... • Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place............................................................................. Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple........... heater.................

....................2......... If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties........... .. • Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures.... ....... Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures..... • Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective circuits........ ..................................................................... • Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers....... • When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part........... always use the correct scale and measure carefully.................................................................. Leaking laser light may damage eyesight........................ ..... • Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot................................. ................................ • Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when replacing them....................................................................................... CAUTION • Wear safe clothing............... Keep away from chains and belts.......................................................... They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly. Check that the power plug is dust-free........... . make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections........................... Using a piece of wire.............Precautions for Maintenance WARNING • Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly.......................................................... for example........ • Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine.................. could lead to fire or other serious accident............ • Always use parts having the correct specifications........................................... heat and press rollers are clean.............................................................................................................................................. ... • Check that the power cable covering is free of damage.................... ................ ................................................ If it is dirty.... ................................... ... .................... • Check that the fixing unit thermistor.......... ........... clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock...................... • Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection............................................. .... .............. • Handle the charger sections with care.....................

........ ............... trapped wire and missing screws... always hold the plug itself... • Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them...... Replace with new ones if necessary..................... always check that all the parts........ if any... being careful not to spill... etc........................... it may generate toxic gas............ remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately................. .................................................................. · Always wash hands afterwards......... • Should smoke be seen coming from the copier.................................... have been refitted correctly... . screws............................ • Remove toner completely from electronic components......................... ......... Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector............ other than the specified refiner.................... If necessary.......... ..................... .................................. ......................................................................................................... • After maintenance.. • Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged.................... · Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on.............. • Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ...... ................. from the copier except for routine replacement....... • Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........ 3....... .............................. • Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling................ Wipe spills off completely.... ................................. protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item............• Do not remove the ozone filter.... ................................ connectors and wires that were removed...................... Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a furnace.. • Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire.. · Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.......Miscellaneous WARNING • Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol.................................. • Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped............................ .................................................. · Use only a small amount of solvent at a time.................

.This page is intentionally left blank.

........................................................................................................................................................................................1-2-19 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode ........................................1-4-1 (1) Paper misfeed indication ..............................................................................................................1-4-8 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................1-4-17 1-4-3 Image formation problems ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-2-17 1-2-5 Installing the cassette heater for paper feeder (option) (22 ppm model only)........1-4-2 (3) Paper misfeeds ...................................................................1-3-68 (2) Setting the job accounting .........1-3-73 (6) Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report .................................................................................................................1-4-28 (10) Image is blurred....................1-4-29 (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-16 (1) Self-diagnostic function ....1-3-70 (4) Machine default .............................................................1-4-27 (4) Background is visible......................................................................................................1-4-28 (9) Black dots appear on the image..................................................................................................................... ..........................................................................................................................................1-3-73 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................1-3-73 (8) Language setting.. ............................................1-4-29 (14) Offset occurs..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-29 (13) Paper creases................................................. ..........1-4-26 (2) No image appears (entirely black).................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................... .........................................................................................1-4-29 (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original..............................................1-1-1 1-1-2 Parts names.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-30 (18) Image center does not align with the original center............................1-3-68 (1) Using the management mode ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-31 1-4-4 Electric problems ...........................1-4-28 (7) A black line appears laterally.................................................................................................... .................................1-3-73 (7) Report output.... ..............................................................................................1-3-71 (5) MP Tray setting ........................................1-4-16 (2) Self diagnostic codes ...........1-4-36 .....................................1-3-1 (1) Executing a maintenance item .................................................................1-4-32 1-4-5 Mechanical problems .........1-2-2 (1) Installation procedure ........................1-4-25 (1) No image appears (entirely white)................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ..............1-3-2 (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-26 (3) Image is too light...... ..................................................................................................................1-4-1 (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ......................................................................................1-2-1 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-27 (5) A white line appears longitudinally...........................................................................................................................1-4-27 (6) A black line appears longitudinally....................................................................................................................................1-1-6 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 Installation environment ................................................................................................................................................1-4-30 (17) Image is out of focus...........................................................................................................................................1-4-28 (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other...........................1-1-4 (1) Body ........................1-1-5 1-1-3 Machine cross section .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-2-12 1-2-4 Installing the cassette heater (option) .............................................................................................1-4-30 (15) Image is partly missing.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-4-30 (16) Fusing is poor......................1-3-1 (2) Maintenance modes item list.................1-2-2 (2) Setting initial copy modes..............1-3-5 1-3-2 Management mode .........................................................2KJ/2KH CONTENTS 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications...........................1-1-4 (2) Operation panel.......................................................................................1-3-69 (3) Copy default ...1-2-11 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) ...............................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-62 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware.................................1-5-13 (6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-6-2 2-1 Mechanical construction 2-1-1 Paper feed section ...............................................1-6-2 1-6-3 Remarks on main PWB and engine PWB replacement. .......................................................................1-5-47 (2) Detaching and refitting the press roller.....................2-1-11 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections............................................................................................................................................1-5-33 (4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .....................................1-5-51 (4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws.........1-5-18 (8) Detaching and refitting the left registration roller................1-5-1 (2) Drum.............1-5-45 1-5-7 Fuser section ............................................................................................1-5-55 (6) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor .........................................................1-5-24 (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp..............2-1-15 2-1-8 Duplex section ....................................................1-5-22 1-5-3 Optical section .............................1-5-57 (7) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostat .......1-6-1 1-6-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ........2KJ/2KH 1-5 Assembly and Disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly..........................................................................................................................................2-1-9 (1) Single component developing system......................................................................1-5-54 (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................1-5-9 (4) Detaching and refitting the cassette separation pulley (22 ppm model only) ...............................................................................1-5-24 (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ..............................................1-5-58 (8) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness) ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (1) Precautions ..................................................1-5-47 (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit....1-5-6 (3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (22 ppm model only)..................................................................................................................1-5-21 (9) Detaching and refitting the right registration roller..........................................2-1-13 2-1-7 Eject and switchback sections .........................................................................................................................................1-5-11 (5) Detaching and refitting the cassette forwarding pulley and cassette paper feed pulley (22 ppm model only).........2-1-3 (2) Laser scanner section ........................................................1-5-1 (4) How to tell a genuine Olivetti toner container..................................................................................................1-5-59 1-5-8 Others ..........................................2-1-17 ............................................................................................................................................................................1-5-1 (3) Toner ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-26 (2-1) Detaching the scanner wires .....1-5-44 1-5-6 Transfer section .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-2 1-5-2 Paper feed section ......................2-1-7 2-1-4 Developing section..........................................................................................1-5-43 1-5-5 Developing section.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-1-1 2-1-2 Optical section .....................................................................................2-1-3 (1) Image scanner section ............................................................................................................................................................1-5-49 (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater ........................................................................................................1-5-44 (1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit ....1-5-60 (2) Direction of installing the principal fan motors...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-1-12 2-1-6 Fuser section .....................................................................................................1-5-29 (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)....1-5-40 1-5-4 Drum section.............................1-5-3 (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley...................................1-5-3 (1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-60 (1) Detaching and refitting the eject unit ..2-1-5 2-1-3 Drum section..............................1-5-16 (7) Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad .................................................1-5-26 (2-2) Fitting the scanner wires .....................................1-5-42 (3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit................1-5-41 (1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1-5-35 (5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ..................................................................................................................1-5-45 (1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ..............................................................1-5-41 (2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws .......

.....................................2-4-8 INSTALLATION GUIDE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR PAPER FEEDER DUPLEX UNIT BUILT-IN FINISHER JOB SEPARATOR FAX System (R) Scan System (F)B ...................2-4-1 Periodic maintenance procedures .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (2) Switches and sensors .........................................................................................................................................................................................2-3-13 Operation PWB ..............................................................................................................2-2-5 (4) Others.............................................................................................................................................................................2-3-1 Main PWB ................2-4-7 Paper feeder wiring diagram (22 ppm model only) ...........................................................................................2-2-3 (3) Motors ...................................................2-3-18 2-4 Appendixes Maintenance parts list ....................................................................2-3-3 Engine PWB.................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-4-2 Chart of image adjustment procedures...................2-3-16 Cassette main PWB (22 ppm model only) ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-2-1 (1) PWBs ............................................................................2KJ/2KH 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2-3-7 Cassette PWB..................2-4-5 Wiring diagram.................2-2-6 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-3 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-6 Power source PWB.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

2KJ/2KH This page is intentionally left blank. .

Cassette: A3.................. A6R. Custom 1 to 8 Paper size......... Recycled. Oficio II. B5: 20 sheets/min..... 16K.. Executive........ 16K A3...... Envelope #10 (Comm. B4............... A4....... A4R/LetterR: 13 sheets/min........ Folio. A3/Ledger: 8 sheets/min........................ LetterR....... A5R: 10 sheets/min.. Youkei 2... ISO B5...... B5R. Oficio II.. Rough... Preprinted.. Prepunched... Manual mode: 25 to 400%......... Color (Colour).. Envelope C4......... Rough............. Envelope #9 (Comm........ B5R: 13 sheets/min. Cardstock........... B5R: 13 sheets/min............... Cassette: Plain... books and three-dimensional objects Maximum original size: A3/Ledger Original feed system ......105 g/m2 MP tray: 45 ............ Hagaki... B5: 16 sheets/min........ #9).............. A4R... Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Photoconductor............ Transparency (OHP film)... B4. Legal..... A4........ Letter.2KJ/2KH 1-1 Specifications 1-1-1 Specifications Type ..... Single positive corona charging Developing system .. StatementR........... Statement.. Single component developing system Toner: magnetism toner Toner replenishing: Automatic from a toner container Transfer system ... Indirect electrostatic system Supported original types ....2 s Paper capacity .... B6R.. 16KR..... Letterhead.. Labels.... Custom 1 to 8 MP tray: Plain.. LetterR.... 1% increments Auto mode: Preset zoom Printing speed............... 8K...... B4.............. Ledger.. Cassette: 300 sheets (80 g/m2)... First copy time .... B5R.............. High Quality....... 25 sheets (B4/Legal or more) Output tray capacity.. 1 to 999 sheets Light source ....7 s or less Warm-up time ... Envelope C5......... A4.. High Quality. Thick.... A4R/LetterR: 13 sheets/min.............. B5. Bond. A5R.... Oficio II.. B4/Legal: 11 sheets/min.. Bond.... B5.. Desktop Printing system . 5... A4R.. Oufuku Hagaki..... Legal.. Letterhead... A3/Ledger: 10 sheets/min... Room temperature 22 °C/71..... Semiconductor laser Charging system....... Recycled. 22 ppm model A4/Letter: 22 sheets/min............ B6R. Fixed Paper weight................. A5R... Youkei 4... Sheets...... 8K..... Letter.... A4R.... 8K. Cassette: 64 ..... 18 ppm model A4/Letter: 18 sheets/min....... Preprinted....... B5......... 16K MP tray: A3............. #6 3/4)...... Envelope.6 °F..... 150 sheets (90 g/m2 or more) MP tray: 100 sheets (A4/Letter or less).. Envelope #6 (Comm. Inert gas lamp Scanning system ...... LetterR.. Envelope DL.... 60% RH Power on: 17... #10)........ B4/Legal: 8 sheets/min............... Ledger........... A5R...... Ledger.... B5R.. Statement...... Color (Colour).......... Folio..... Transfer roller Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-1-1 .............. Top tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2) When job separator installed: 150 sheets (80 g/m2) When built-in finisher installed: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Continuous copying ... Legal..... Envelope Monarch.160 g/m2 Paper type ................... Folio..... Letter................2 s Low power mode:10 s Sleep mode: 17...... A5R: 10 sheets/min.. Vellum. Zoom level ........ OPC (drum diameter 30 mm) Image write system.. Prepunched. A6R......

...... Blade and cleaning roller Charge erasing system.......................... duplex unit.8 lbs 22 ppm model: 40 kg/88.... 600 dpi.............................. 300 dpi..... 18 ppm model 568 (W) x 594 (D) x 502 (H) mm (main body only) 22 3/8" (W) x 23 3/8" (D) x 19 3/4" (H) (main body only) 22 ppm model 568 (W) x 594 (D) x 607 (H) mm (main body only) 22 3/8" (W) x 23 3/8" (D) x 23 7/8" (H) (main body only) Weight.......... Windows Vista.........5°C/50 to 90....1 A Options .............. Windows Server 2003..2KJ/2KH Separation system . 9. 5..................................... 600 x 600 dpi Operating environment ........... hard disk and expansion memory Printer functions Printing speed.... built-in finisher.............. Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later)............................... Document processor........................................... Same as copying speed First print time .. paper feeder.................. Heat roller Heat source: Halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostats Main memory ................................. Temperature: 10 to 32...................................................... Windows XP.. 60 Hz. job separator............................................ 5................................................... key counter........................ 838 mm (W) x 594 (D) mm (using MP tray) 33" (W) x 23 3/8" (D) (using MP tray) Power source.. PRESCRIBE 1-1-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .......... FAX kit. 120 V AC...... Memory card interface: 1 USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) Option interface: 1 Resolution....7 s or less Resolution... Fast 1200 Operating system. USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed) Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX) Memory. 18 ppm model: 33 kg/72..........2 lbs Space required......... Exposure by cleaning lamp Fusing system....... 50 Hz. Apple Macintosh OS 10.................................................. Standard: 64 MB Maximum: 192 MB Interface.7 A 220 to 240 V AC.............. Standard: 128 MB Maximum: 1152 MB Page description language ......x Interface.....202 ft maximum Brightness: 1500 lux maximum Dimensions .................................................... Curvature separation and separation electrode Cleaning system .5°F Humidity: 15 to 80% RH Altitude: 2500 m/8.............. network scanner kit...........

.................. A4R..... Electrically connected to the machine............. 8K.. 0............... Recycled Paper size..... B4......5 kg or less / 1.. 11 images/min (300 dpi) Network protocol. Image quality: Text/Photo original Single scanning: 22 images/min (600 dpi).... TCP/IP Transmission system ....... Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later)................ 600 dpi..... 22 images/min (300 dpi) Dual scanning: 11 images/min (600 dpi)........... Plain....... A3............ 64 .......... Legal......................... Folio... Windows Vista System requirements .................. B5R....................... Internal type Paper weight......................... 400 dpi.105 g/m2 Paper type ..........2KJ/2KH Scanner functions Operating system...... Letter.... StatementR....... 300 dpi....... Windows XP... A5R........................... CPU 600 MHz or higher RAM 128 MB or more Resolution..... 200 dpi File format..... Oficio II.......... PDF (MMR compression) Scanning speed .. LetterR..... PC transmission: Scan to PC E-mail transmission: Scan to E-mail Twain scan: TWAIN Driver Duplex unit Type ... 16K Power source.................................................................. A4 landscape................. Ledger.................. B5........... 363 (W) x 54 (D) x 181 (H) mm 14 5/16" (W) x 2 1/8" (D) x 7 1/8" (H) Weight. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-1-3 ........1 lbs or less NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.... A4...... Dimensions .................... TIFF (MMR compression).....................................

17. 6. 12. 14. 11. 2. 3. MP tray extension Slider Contact glass Original size indicator plates Left cover Front cover Toner container release lever Toner container Charger cleaner rod 19. 4. 24. 21. 7. 5. Waste toner box Handles for transport Main power switch Main power switch cover USB interface connector Network interface connector Memory card slot 1-1-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 15. 9.2KJ/2KH 1-1-2 (1) Body Parts names 1 2 3 13 12 11 9 7 4 10 11 8 5 6 14 15 18 25 16 24 23 22 20 20 21 19 17 Figure 1-1-1 1. 13. 23. 20. 25. 16. 18. 22. Original cover (option) Output tray Operation panel Cassette 1 Cassette 2 (22ppm model only) Paper width adjusting tab Paper length adjusting tab Left cover handle MP tray 10. 8.

27. 25. 18. 34. 24. 12.2KJ/2KH (2) Operation panel 34 33 35 29 28 22 23 24 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 37 36 30 31 32 26 27 25 21 17 20 19 16 18 15 13 4 3 1 2 Figure 1-1-2 1. 4. 6. 33. 17. Start key and indicator Stop/Clear key Reset key Numeric keys Main power indicator Power key and indicator Energy saver key and indicator Interrupt key and indicator Logout key Ready indicator (green) Data indicator (green) Attention indicator (red) Enter key Message display Lighter key / Darker key Auto density key Image quality mode select key Paper selection key / Cursor right key Original Size key / Cursor up key 20. 32. 14. 36. 31. 9. 5. 37. 21. 16. 26. 29. 22. 8. 35. 19. 10. 15. 30. 7. 3. 13. 28. 11. Auto%/100% key / Cursor down key Zoom key / Cursor left key Scanner function key Mixed size originals key and indicator Margin key and indicator Collate key and indicator Staple key and indicator Program key Combine key and indicator Border erase key and indicator Duplex key and indicator Offset key and indicator Function key System menu/Counter key and indicator Copy key and indicator Print key and indicator Scan key and indicator Fax key and indicator Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-1-5 . 2. 23.

3. 4. 2.2KJ/2KH 1-1-3 Machine cross section 2 7 6 3 8 5 2 4 1 Light path Paper path Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section 1. Paper feed section Optical section Drum section Developing section Transfer and separation sections Fuser section Eject and switchback sections Duplex section 1-1-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 6. 5. 8. 7.

5°F Humidity: 15 to 80% RH Power supply: 120 V AC. Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°). Select a well-ventilated location. SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents. 3.1 A Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 0. Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity.7 A 220 to 240 V AC.2KJ/2KH 1-2 Installation 1-2-1 1. direct air. Installation environment Temperature: 10 to 32. 5. 9.3% Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine. such as mercury. acidic of alkaline vapors. inorganic gasses.3%/60 Hz ± 0. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine. and cool or hot. 4.5°C/50 to 90. Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations. NOx. 100 mm/3 15/16" 300 mm/11 13/16" 300 mm/11 13/16" 1000 mm/39 3/8" Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-1 . an abrupt change in the environmental temperature. Machine front: 1000 mm/39 3/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/3 15/16" Machine right: 300 mm/11 13/16" Machine left: 300 mm/11 13/16 6. 5. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams. Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor. 2.

Install the optional original cover or the DP. Attaching the operation label. Remove the tapes. Make test copies. Release the scanner pins. Install the optional paper feeder. Completion of the machine installation. Install the waste toner box. Connect the power cord. Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).2KJ/2KH 1-2-2 Unpacking and installation (1) Installation procedure Start Unpack. 1-2-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Installing toner. Attaching the cover label. Install other optional devices. Install the toner container. Load paper. Exit maintenance mode.

2KJ/2KH Unpacking. 10. 7. 8. 3. 21. 6. 5. 19. 17. 20. 13. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-3 . 11. Power cord Paper storage bags Plastic bag Plastic bag Cursor pins Cover label Cassette size label Operation label A Operation label B Hinge joints Barcode labels Caution: Place the machine on a level surface. 9. 15. 18 ppm model Figure 1-2-2 Unpacking 1. Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom left pad Bottom right pad Top left pad Top right pad Machine cover Eject spacer Document tray 12. 22. 4. 14. 18. 2. 16.

13. 17. 11. Power cord Paper storage bags Plastic bag Plastic bag Cursor pins Cover label Cassette size labels Operation label A Operation label B Hinge joints Barcode labels Caution: Place the machine on a level surface. 22. 7. 16.2KJ/2KH 22 ppm model Figure 1-2-3 Unpacking 1. Machine Outer case Inner frame Skid Bottom left pad Bottom right pad Top left pad Top right pad Machine cover Eject spacer Document tray 12. 2. 6. 19. 8. 3. 5. 9. 21. 14. 1-2-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 18. 20. 4. 10. 15.

Remove the tapes. 18 ppm model: Five 22 ppm model: Seven Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape Tape* Tape* *: 22 ppm model only Figure 1-2-5 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-5 .2KJ/2KH Remove the tapes. Tape Tape Tape Plastic sheet Tape Figure 1-2-4 2. 1. Remove four tapes and remove the plastic sheet.

Release the scanner pins. 1. Install the optional paper feeder as necessary.2KJ/2KH 3. 1-2-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Tape Cassette Figure 1-2-6 Install the optional paper feeder. Remove the tapes. 4. Tape Tape Scanner pin Scanner pin Figure 1-2-7 Install the optional original cover or the DP. 18 ppm model: One 22 ppm model: Two (upper and lower cassettes) 5. Remove two scanner pins. Push the cassette back in. Remove two tapes. Pull the cassette out. Install the optional original cover or DP. 2. 1. 1.

2KJ/2KH Install other optional devices. 1. Toner container Figure 1-2-9 4.) as necessary. Install the optional devices (duplex unit. Turn the toner container upside down and tap the upper part five times or more. 2. built-in finisher and/or fax kit etc. Install the toner container. 1. job separator. Open the front cover. Toner container Figure 1-2-8 3. Turn the toner container upside down and shake it five times or more. Shake the toner container up and down five times or more. Toner container Figure 1-2-10 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-7 . Shake the toner container approximately five times in the horizontal direction to stir toner. Hold the toner container vertically and tap the upper part five times or more.

Install the waste toner box in the machine.2KJ/2KH 5. 1. Close the front cover. Toner container Figure 1-2-11 Install the waste toner box. Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place. Gently push the toner container into the machine. 2. Waste toner box Figure 1-2-12 1-2-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine. Press the stop/clear key. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode. 4. Turn the main power switch on. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet. Connect the power cord. The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed. 1. Make test copies. Exit maintenance mode. Place an original and make test copies. 2. Toner installation is started. Attaching the operation label. 1. 1. 1. 1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-9 . Installing toner. Load paper in the cassette. According to need. Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000). 1. Run maintenance mode U130 if [Add Toner] remains displayed even after the drive chain is disengaged. 1. 3. 2. attach the correspond operation label.2KJ/2KH Load paper. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys. Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items. 2.

2KJ/2KH Attaching the cover label. 1. 1-2-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Right side: Two Left side: One [22 ppm model] Cover label Cover label Cover label [18 ppm model] Right side Cover label Cover label Left side Cover label Figure 1-2-13 Completion of the machine installation. Attach the cover labels to three screw holes in the machine.

U253 U254 U260 U264 U277 U326 U342 U343 U344 Contents Switching between double and single counts Turning auto start function ON/OFF Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting the display order of the date Setting auto application change time Setting the black line cleaning indication Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Setting the low-power mode Factory setting DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) ON After ejection MONTH-DATE-YEAR (inch specifications) DATE-MONTH-YEAR (metric specifications) 30 s ON ON OFF ENERGY STAR (inch specifications) GEEA (metric specifications) Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-11 .2KJ/2KH (2) Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows: Maintenance item No.

Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using two screws and nut. 4. Fit the key counter retainer to the key counter mount using two screws. M4 x 6 screw Key counter retainer M4 x 6 screw M3 nut Key counter mount M4 x 6 screw M4 x 6 screw Key counter socket assembly M3 x 6 flat-head (P/N 127233J) screws Key counter cover Figure 1-2-14 1-2-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 3. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. 2.2KJ/2KH 1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) Installing the key counter requires the following component: Key counter (P/N AVGR03671G) Key counter set (P/N AVGR08516B) Key counter wire set Key counter mounting plate (P/N AVGR00804W) Supplied parts of key counter set: Key counter socket assembly (P/N 127233J) Key counter cover Key counter mount Key counter retainer Key counter cover retainer Two (2) Edgings One (1) Band One (1) M3 × 8 tap-tight P screw Two (2) M4 × 10 tap-tight P screws Two (2) M4 × 10 tap-tight S screws Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws One (1) M4 × 20 tap-tight S screw One (1) M3 bronze nut One (1) M3 × 8 bronze binding screw One (1) M4 × 30 tap-tight S screw Five (5) M4 × 6 chrome TP screws Two (2) M4 × 10 chrome TP screws Supplied parts of key counter wire set: Key counter wire (P/N AVGR11503G) Two (2) Wire saddles One (1) Edging Procedure 1. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using two screws. Press the power key on the operation panel to off.

Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Rear cover Figure 1-2-15 6.2KJ/2KH 5. Remove five screws and remove the rear cover. Shield cover Screw Screw Figure 1-2-17 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-13 . Aperture Right middle cover Figure 1-2-16 7. Cut out the aperture on the right middle cover using nippers. Remove two screws and remove the shield cover.

Pass the key counter wire through two wire saddles and the edging. Fit two wire saddles and the edging to machine.2KJ/2KH 8. Edging Wire saddle Edging Wire saddle Figure 1-2-18 9. Wire saddle Edging Wire saddle Key counter wire Figure 1-2-19 1-2-14 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Aperture 4-pin connector Key counter wire YC12 4-pin connector Engine PWB Figure 1-2-21 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-15 .2KJ/2KH 10. Put the 1-pin connector that is not connected in the shield box. 11. Pull the other 4-pin connector out from the aperture of the right middle cover. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter wire to the YC12 on the engine PWB. Bands Key counter wire Shield cover Figure 1-2-20 12. Refit the rear cover. Refit the shield cover. Insert two bands of the key counter wire to the machine and shield cover. 14. 13.

24. Insert the hook of the key counter mounting plate in the aperture of the right middle cover. Run maintenance item U204 and select "KEY-COUNTER". 18. Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode.2KJ/2KH 15. Hook the square hole on the key counter cover onto the key counter mounting plate. Aperture 4-pin connector 4-pin connector Hook Key counter mounting plate M4 x 30 screw Key counter cover Figure 1-2-23 21. 22. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter signal cable to the 4-pin connector of the key counter wire. Key counter mounting plate (AVGR00804W) Aperture 4-pin connector key counter signal cable key counter cover Hook Square hole Figure 1-2-22 17. Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the message display when the key counter is pulled out. Exit the maintenance mode. 25. Fit the key counter cover and the key counter mounting plate using the M4 x 30 screw. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter mounting plate. 16. 23. 19. Check that the counter counts up as copies are made. 1-2-16 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 20. Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly.

Remove the screw and release three hooks and then remove the front right cover. 2.2KJ/2KH 1-2-4 Installing the cassette heater (option) Installing the cassette heater requires the following component: Cassette heater (P/N AVGR11493B): for 220 to 240 V specifications only One (1) M3 x 8 S tight screw Procedure 1. Screw Front right cover Hook Front right cover Hook Hook Figure 1-2-24 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-17 . 3. Pull out the cassette. Open the front cover.

Pass the cassette heater cable through the edging and fit the cassette heater to the machine. 6. Attach the cassette heater using the M3 x 8 S tight screw. Refit all the removed parts.2KJ/2KH 4. 7. Edging Cassette heater cable Cassette heater Figure 1-2-25 5. Connect the connector of the cassette heater cable to the connector of the machine. Pass the cassette heater cable through the clamp. Clamp Connector Cassette heater cable M3 x 8 S tight screw Figure 1-2-26 1-2-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Cassette rear cover Screw Pin Figure 1-2-27 3. Insert the stay of the cassette heater into the hole at the machine rear side.2KJ/2KH 1-2-5 Installing the cassette heater for paper feeder (option) (22 ppm model only) Installing the cassette heater requires the following component: Cassette heater (P/N 303MH94060): for 220 to 240 V specifications only Cassette heater (P/N 303MH94050): for 120 V specifications One (1) M3 x 8 P tight screw (P/N 7BB202308H) Procedure 1. 4. Attach the cassette heater using the M3 x 8 P tight screw. 2. 5. Pull out the cassette. Remove the screw and the pin and then remove the cassette rear cover. Pass the cassette heater cable through the hole at the machine rear side. Cassette heater cable Cassette heater Stay M3 x 8 P tight screw Figure 1-2-28 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-2-19 .

Connect the connector of the cassette heater cable to the connector of the machine. 7. Connector Cassette heater cable Figure 1-2-29 1-2-20 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH 6. Refit all the removed parts.

Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys. Maintenance mode is entered. (1) Executing a maintenance item Start Enter 10871087 using the numeric keys. Maintenance mode is exited. Press the start key. Yes Repeat the same maintenance item? No Yes Run another maintenance item? No Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys and press the start key. End Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-1 . The selected maintenance item is run.2KJ/2KH 1-3 Maintenance Mode 1-3-1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine. Press the stop/clear key. The maintenance item is selected.

0/0.0/0.5/0.2KJ/2KH (2) Maintenance modes item list Section General Item No.0*1 330/210*1 30/20/0/-20/-20/20*1 0.7/-0.0/0.4/0.0/0.8*1 -2.0*1 2.8/0.*2 2.0*1 12*1 0*1 0/-10*1 0/0*1 -4/0*1 0*1 0/0*1 0/0/0/0*1 0/0/0*1 0*1 ON/35*1 0/0/0/2/3*1 170/30/240*1 U035 U051 U053 Optical U060 U061 U063 U065 U066 U067 U068 U070 U071 U072 U073 U074 U076 U087 U089 U092 U093 U099 *Initial setting for executing U020.0/0. paper feed.0/0.1/-0.0/0. *1: The item initialized for executing U020.0/0. U000 U001 U002 U003 U004 U005 U019 Initialization U020 U021 U022 U026 U027 Drive.3/0. paper conveying and cooling system U030 U031 U032 U034 Content of maintenance item Outputting an own-status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data Setting the service telephone number Displaying the machine number Copying without paper Displaying the ROM version Initializing all data Initializing counters and mode settings Initializing backup memory Evacuation of backup data Return of backup data Checking motor operation Checking switches for paper conveying Checking clutch operation Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line Adjusting the trailing edge registration Setting the printing area for folio paper Length/Width Adjusting the deflection in the paper Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Adjusting the scanner input properties Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Adjusting the scanner center line Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Adjusting the DP magnification Adjusting the DP scanning timing Adjusting the DP center line Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Executing DP automatic adjustment Setting DP reading position modification operation Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo/Text/Photo Adjusting original size detection Initial setting* ****************1.5/0. *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .0/0.0/-0.0/0.1 -0.3/0.

*2 ON*1.*2 MODE0*1 4/4/4*1 150000*1. *2: The item initialized for executing U021 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-3 . *1: The item initialized for executing U020.*2 EJECT*1. U100 Content of maintenance item Setting the main high voltage Grid control voltage Copy interval Copy quantity Correction amount Setting the other high voltages Setting the developing bias Setting the transfer voltage Setting the separation voltage Checking the drum count Initial setting for the developing unit Setting toner loading operation Checking sensors for toner Checking/clearing the developing drive time Checking the developing count Setting the fuser control temperature Primary stabilization fixing temperature Secondary stabilization fixing temperature Copying operation temperature 1 Copying operation temperature 2 Initial setting* 107*1 60*1 50*1 10*1 27/45/22/45*1 123/126/33/31*1 1/20/42/2*1 OFF/5/30*1 145*1 165*1 175*1 185*1 1*1 2*1 OFF*1.*2 U101 U110 Developing U130 U144 U150 U157 U158 Fuser and cleaning U161 U162 U163 U167 U198 U199 Operation panel and support equipment U200 U202 U203 U204 U207 U233 U243 U244 U245 U246 U249 Mode setting U250 U251 U252 U253 U254 U260 Stabilizing fixing forcibly Resetting the fuser problem data Checking/clearing the fuser counts Setting the fuser phase control Checking the fuser temperature Turning all LEDs on Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Checking DP operation Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Checking the operation panel keys Limiting job separator output Checking the operation of the DP motors Checking the DP switches Checking messages Setting the finisher Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Setting the maintenance cycle Checking/clearing the maintenance count Setting the destination Switching between double and single counts Turning auto start function ON/OFF Selecting the timing for copy counting *Initial setting for executing U020.2KJ/2KH Section High voltage Item No.*2 JAPAN*1 DOUBLE COUNT (A3/LEDGER)*1.*2 OFF*1.

0/2.0*1 2.0/3. U264 U265 U277 U326 U332 U341 U342 U343 U344 U345 Image processing U402 U403 U404 U407 Network scanner Others U504 U506 U901 U903 U904 U905 U906 U908 U910 U911 U917 U920 U925 U926 U927 U928 U931 U941 U942 U969 U990 U991 U993 Content of maintenance item Setting the display order of the date Setting OEM purchaser code Setting auto application change time Setting the black line cleaning indication Setting the size conversion factor Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Setting the low-power mode Setting the value for maintenance due indication Adjusting margins of image printing Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Initializing the scanner NIC Setting the time out Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Checking/clearing the service call counts Checking counts by optional devices Resetting partial operation control Checking the total counter value Clearing the black ratio data Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes Setting backup data reading/writing Checking the copy counts Checking/clearing the system error counts Rewriting FAX program Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) Checking machine life counts Setting the automatic toner install Setting the default magnification ratio of the default cassette Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Checking of toner area code Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Checking the scanner count Outputting a VTC-PG pattern Initial setting* MONTH-DATE-YEAR (inch) DATE-MONTH-YEAR (metric) 0*1 30*1.0/1.0*1 10*1. *1: The item initialized for executing U020.*2 OFF*1.*2 OFF*1 100%*1.0/1.*2 0/0*1 - *Initial setting for executing U020.0/2.*2 ON*1.0/3. *2: The item initialized for executing U021 1-3-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 .*2 ON*1.*2 3.0*1 0.0*1 2.*2 1.0/2.*2 GEEA (metric)*1.0/3.0*1.2KJ/2KH Section Mode setting Item No.0/4.*2 ENERGY STAR (inch)*1.0/2.*2 0*1.

a report of this size is output. specify the paper feed location. Turn the main power switch off and on. or the occurrences of paper jams and service calls. and occurrences of paper jams and service calls.2KJ/2KH (3) Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output. Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items. Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings. Method Press the start key. Purpose To exit the maintenance mode. Press the start key. 2. Press the start key. 3. is displayed. Select the item to be output. Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed). Method 1. the screen for selecting an item is displayed. 4. Press the start key. U002 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-5 . When A4/Letter paper is available. Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered. U000 Description Outputting an own-status report Description Prints out a list of the current settings of all maintenance items. The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport. Display MAINTENANCE JAM SERVICE CALL Output list List of the current settings of the maintenance modes List of the paper jam occurrences List of the service call occurrences 3. Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. If not. U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode. 2. print out a list of the current settings of the maintenance items so that you can reenter the same settings after initialization or replacement. When output is complete.

The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. press the keys shown below as required.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Move the cursor using the cursor left/right keys and select a number or symbol using the cursor up/down keys. Setting 1. 2. Method 1. Key * key # key Image mode selection key Auto density key Lighter key Darker key Symbol * # ( ) Space 3. Press the start key. Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U004 Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number. The currently machine number is displayed. Press the start key. Press the start key. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys. Purpose To check the machine number. The phone number is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 1-3-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 . To enter symbols. U003 Description Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected. Completion Press the stop/clear key. is displayed. is displayed.

3. The copy mode screen is displayed. Select the item to be operated. Changes in the following settings can be made. Press the interrupt key. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Press the start key. continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting. To control the paper feed pulley. To return to the screen for selecting an item. press the stop/clear key. press the interrupt key. 7. Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. Completion Press the stop/clear key. U005 Description Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed. 8. remove all the paper in the drawers. Copy density Keys on the operation panel 6. or the drawers. Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The operation starts. is displayed. Press the start key. Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies: in simplex copy mode. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-7 . Both the machine and DP operate (continuous operation). Display PPC PPC + DP Operation Only the machine operates. continuous copying is performed when set to 999.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. in duplex copy mode. 4. Press the start key. With the paper present. the paper feed pulley does not operate. To stop continuous operation. Method 1. 5. 2.

Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys. U020 Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PWB to return to the original settings. is displayed. Display MAIN ENGINE LANG(St) LANG(Op) MAIN BOOT PRINTER NWS DP FINISHER CASS2 CASS3 CASS4 Description Main ROM Engine ROM Standard language ROM Optional language ROM Boot of main ROM Printer ROM Optional network scanner ROM Optional DP ROM Optional built-in finisher ROM Optional first paper feeder ROM (standard for 22 ppm model) Optional second paper feeder ROM Optional third paper feeder ROM Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. All data in the backup memory is initialized and the default setting for the Japan specifications is registered. Reset each intialized mode based on an own-status report U000 printed at installing the machine. Press the start key. Method 1. 4. When initialization is complete. Method 1. Purpose To be executed as required. Press the start key. 2. Purpose To check the part number or to decide. The ROM version are displayed. 1-3-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. if the newest version of ROM is installed. 2. U019 Description Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB. Refer to *1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized. 3.

is displayed. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination. Method 1. Method 1. the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. 2. The screen displays the result. 3. Verification abnormality occurs at the time of check sum entry. Verification abnormality occurs. When initialization is complete. Method 1. U990 and U991) is initialized. Purpose To be executed as required. service call history and mode setting. 2. Evacuation of backup data Description Transfers the backup data of the main PWB to the EEPROM. Press the stop/clear key. U021 Description Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes all settings. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Purpose Used when replacing the main PWB. except those pertinent to the type of machine. U022 U026 4. The setting data of scanner function initial settings are initialized. Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. and the registered transmission and reception are cleared. U092 to 099. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-9 . 4. Press the start key. 3. EXECUTE CHECK SUM : **** CODE : XXXX (See the table below) Code 0000 0101 0102 Description Processing ends correctly. Refer to *2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. namely each counter. Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U403. Press the start key. is displayed. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067. Press the start key to transfer the backup data. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initialized based on the destination setting. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Press the start key. Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Initializing backup memory Description Initializes only the data set for the optical section or initializes various setting data when installing the optional network scanner board.

press the stop/clear key. 1-3-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Press the start key to transfer the backup data. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. To stop operation. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Purpose To use after the main PWB replaced. The screen displays the result. U027 Description Return of backup data Description Transfers the backup data of the EEPROM which was transferred with the U026 to flash memory. Select the motor to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. Method 1. Disconnect and connect the power plug. Purpose To check the operation of each motor. 4. 2. is displayed. Check sum does not agree when reading out from the EEPROM. 3. is displayed. Display MAIN DRUM T1 T2 T3 EJE1 EJE2 Operation Drive motor (DM) is turned ON Drum motor (DRM) is turned ON Cassette drive motor 1 (CDM1) is turned ON (option for 18 ppm model / standard for 22 ppm model) Cassette drive motor 2 (CDM2) is turned ON (option) Cassette drive motor 3 (CDM3) is turned ON (option) Eject motor (EM) is turned ON (forward) Eject motor (EM) is turned ON (reverse) 4. The operation starts. Select the [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. EXECUTE CHECK SUM : **** CODE : XXXX (See the table below) Code 0000 0203 Description Processing ends correctly. Completion Press the stop/clear key after operation stops. U030 Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor. Press the start key.

Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly. Method 1. U031 Description Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path. The clutch or solenoid turns on for 1 s. Purpose To check the operation of each clutch or solenoid. U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch or solenoid on. 3. Select the clutch or solenoid to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. 2. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2. is displayed. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-11 . Display EJE RES PF2 PF3 BRA DUP JOB Switches Eject switch (ESW) Registration switch (RSW) Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) (option for 18 ppm model / standard for 22 ppm model) Cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) (option) Feedshift switch (FSSW) Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) (option) Job eject switch (JBESW) (option) Completion Press the stop/clear key. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position. is displayed. Display PF1 PFBYP REG DUP PF2 PF3 PF4 Clutches and solenoid Paper feed clutch (PFCL) MP solenoid (MPSOL) Registration clutch (RCL) Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL) Cassette paper feed clutch 1 (CPFCL1) (option for 18 ppm model / standard for 22 ppm model) Cassette paper feed clutch 2 (CPFCL2) (option) Cassette paper feed clutch 3 (CPFCL3) (option) Completion Press the stop/clear key. Method 1. the display for that switch will be highlighted.

Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the trailing edges of the copy image and original.1 mm 0.0 -5.0 to 10.0 0. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.8 0.0 to 10. decrease the value. 3.0 0.0 Initial setting 2. Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Press the start key to output a test pattern.0 to 10.1 mm 0.0 to 10.0 -5. For output example 2.1 mm 2. U034 U066 (P.1-3-23) 1-3-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 .0 0. Press the start key. 4.0 mm) Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-1 5. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.0 -5.1-3-19) U071 (P. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Display ADJ.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.0 0. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. 2.1 mm 0. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. MGN REAR Description Leading edge registration adjustment Center line adjustment Trailing edge margin adjustment Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment 1. U034 Description Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line. For output example 1.8 Change in value per step 0. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Display RCL ON RCL BYP RCL T1 RCL T2 RCL T3 RCL DUP Description Paper feed from cassette Paper feed from MP tray Paper feed from optional first paper feeder (standard for 22ppm model) Paper feed from optional second paper feeder Paper feed from optional third paper feeder Duplex mode (second side) Setting range -5. Method 1.0 to 10.1 mm 0. If the image is still incorrect.1 mm 0. Leading edge registration (20 ± 1. Press the interrupt key.0 -5.0 to 10. increase the value.0 -5. LSU ON TIMING ADJ. Press the start key. The value is set. RCL ON TIMING ADJ.

0 0. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.0 to 10.0 to 10. For output example 2. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.1 mm 0. 3.1-3-20) U072 (P.1 mm 0.0 to 10.0 mm) Correct image Output example 1 Output example 2 Figure 1-3-2 5.0 -7. Press the interrupt key. decrease the value. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.0 0. Display LSU OUT LSU BYP LSU T1 LSU T2 LSU T3 LSU DUP Description Paper feed from cassette Paper feed from MP tray Paper feed from optional first paper feeder (standard for 22ppm model) Paper feed from optional second paper feeder Paper feed from optional third paper feeder Duplex mode (second side) Setting range -7.0 to 10.0 to 10.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.0 -7.0 -7. Center line of printing (± 1. U034 Description Adjustment: Center line adjustment 1. increase the value.0 Initial setting -2.0 -7. U034 U067 (P.0 -7.1 mm 0.1 mm 2.0 0.0 Change in value per step 0. For output example 1. The value is set.1-3-25) Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-13 .1 mm 0.4 0.1 mm 0. Press the start key to output a test pattern. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. 4. Press the start key.0 0.0 to 10. If the image is still incorrect.

Press the start key. 1-3-14 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper. Press the start key to output a test pattern. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. For output example. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.0 to 10. U034 Description Adjustment: Trailing edge margin adjustment 1.0 Change in value per step 0. 4. The value is set. is displayed. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Trailing edge margin Correct image Output example Figure 1-3-3 5. Display MGN REAR Description Trailing edge margin adjustment Setting range -4. Press the interrupt key. Press the start key. 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. Setting 1. increase the value. 2. Display LENGTH DATA WIDTH DATA Setting Length Width Setting range 330 to 356 mm 200 to 220 mm Initial setting 330 210 4. Press the start key.1 ms 2. Select [MGN REAR]. U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper.0 Initial setting 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-4 6. 2. Completion Press the stop/clear key. For output example 2. 4. or if the copy paper is Z-folded.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U051 Description Adjusting the deflection in the paper Description Adjusts the deflection in the paper. Press the interrupt key. increase the value. 5. is displayed. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. The greater the value. For output example 1. the larger the deflection. Display PF1 BYPASS PF2 PF3 PF4 DUPLEX Description Paper feed from cassette Paper feed from MP tray Paper feed from optional first paper feeder (standard for 22ppm model) Paper feed from optional second paper feeder Paper feed from optional third paper feeder Duplex mode (second side) Setting range -50 to 127 -50 to 127 -50 to 127 -50 to 127 -50 to 127 -50 to 127 Initial setting 30 20 0 -20 -20 20 3. Adjustment 1. decrease the value. Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-15 . Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. The value is set. the smaller the deflection. Press the start key. the smaller the value. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.

3 0.0 to 5.3 0. Press the start key.1 -0. Correct values for an A3/Ledger output are: A = 300 ± 1. B: Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction. B4 and Ledger) Eject motor speed (optional ejection correction value in the case of paper size other than those above) Eject motor speed (ejection motor correction value at the time of duplex inner ejection) Paper conveying motor speed adjustment (for optional built-in finisher) Setting range -5.0 to 5.0 Adjustment 1.0 -5. A: Drive motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction. Press the interrupt key. Display MAIN POLY EJE DRUM BYP CAS DUP EJE2 Description Drive motor speed adjustment Polygon motor speed adjustment Eject motor speed adjustment Drum motor speed adjustment Motor speed adjustment (for paper feed from MP tray) Motor speed adjustment (for paper feed from optional paper feeder) Motor speed adjustment (for duplex mode) Eject motor speed (optional ejection correction value in the case of paper size of A3.1 -0.0 -0.0 -5.0 mm Figure 1-3-5 3.0 mm B = 270 ± 1.0 0. Press the start key to output an A3/Ledger VTC pattern. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key.0 -5. and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.0 to 5. 2. is displayed.0 to 5.0 0. 4. and decreasing it makes the image longer in the main scanning direction.7 -0.0 EJE4 0.5 DF -4.0 to 5. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.0 -5. 2.5 0.0 Initial setting 0.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.0 to 5.0 to 5. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. The value is set. Purpose To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U053 Description Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.0 0.0 EJE3 -5.0 to 5. Method 1.0 to 4.0 -5.0 -5.0 to 5.0 -5.0 to 5. 1-3-16 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Purpose Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Purpose To check the exposure lamp. To prevent this problem. and decreasing it makes the density higher. Description Image scanning density Setting range 0 to 23 Initial setting 12 Increasing the setting makes the density lower. Setting 1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Description Shading position Setting range -5 to 5 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. The exposure lamp lights. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key). Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. press the stop/clear key. Method 1. Caution The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item: Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093) Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on. U060 Description Adjusting the scanner input properties Description Adjusts the image scanning density. Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. 2. 3. and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine right. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Press the start key. The value is set. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner. To turn the exposure lamp off. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Setting 1. Press the start key. the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains. 3. Press the start key. 1-3-17 Y111000-1 Service Manual . 3. is displayed. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The value is set. is displayed. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.17 mm U063 Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine left. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key). Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed.

1 % 0. Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect. increase the value. decrease the value. 3. Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. is displayed.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The value is set. U065 Description Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-7 4. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect.1-3-22) Method 1. Select [SUB SCAN ADJ] using the cursor up/down keys. 1. 2.1-3-20) U070 (P. Press the interrupt key. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-6 5. decrease the value. 3. Adjustment: Auxiliary scanning direction 1. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. 4.1 % Adjustment: Main scanning direction 1. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. The value is set. Select [MAIN SCAN ADJ] using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the interrupt key. 1-3-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 . U053 (P. 2. For copy example 2. Press the start key. For copy example 2. 2. Press the start key. increase the value. For copy example 1. Select the item to be adjusted.1-3-16) (main scanning direction) U065 (auxiliary scanning direction) U065 U067 (P. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Display MAIN SCAN ADJ SUB SCAN ADJ Description Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Setting range -25 to 25 -25 to 25 Initial setting 0 -10 Change in value per step 0. For copy example 1.

1-3-55) Completion Press the stop/clear key. 4. Adjustment 1.1-3-23) U404 (P. If the image is still incorrect. U066 U403 (P. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. U066 Description Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. 5. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. Display ADJUST DATA 1 ADJUST DATA2 Description Scanner leading edge registration Scanner leading edge registration (rotate copying) Setting range -32 to 20 -20 to 20 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original. Press the interrupt key. 2.17 mm 0. decrease the value. Scanner leading edge registration Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-8 6. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The value is set.084 mm 3. For copy example 2. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-19 . increase the value. Press the start key.1-3-54) U071 (P. For copy example 1. is displayed.

Scanner center line Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-9 6. If the image is still incorrect. For copy example 2. U067 U403 (P. Press the interrupt key. Adjustment 1. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. decrease the value. Press the start key. Display ADJUST DATA 1 ADJUST DATA 2 Description Scanner center line Scanner center line (rotate copying) Setting range -39 to 39 -39 to 39 Initial setting -4 0 Change in value per step 0.084 mm 3. 5.1-3-55) Completion Press the stop/clear key. increase the value. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. 1-3-20 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original. Press the start key. 4. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. U067 Description Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning. 2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. For copy example 1.1-3-54) U072 (P. is displayed. The value is set.17 mm 0. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.1-3-25) U404 (P.

Description Starting position adjustment forscanning originals Setting range -17 to 17 Initial setting 0 Change in value per step 0. 2. Setting 1.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Press the start key. Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. and decreasing it moves the image forward.17 mm Increasing the value moves the image backward. Completion Press the stop/clear key. U068 Description Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key). Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. is displayed. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-21 . The value is set. Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used.

Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. 2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. increase the value. Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used. 3. 1-3-22 Service Manual Y111000-1 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.1-3-23) U404 (P. Press the interrupt key. If the image is still incorrect. 2. is displayed. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-10 4. For copy example 2. The value is set. decrease the value. U070 U071 (P.2 mm 0. Press the start key. Adjustment 1.2 mm 1. U070 Description Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.1-3-55) Completion Press the stop/clear key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Display CONVEY SPEED 1 CONVEY SPEED 2 Description Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (first page) Magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (second page) Setting range -25 to 25 -25 to 25 Initial setting 0 0 Change in value per step 0. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. For copy example 1.

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U071

Description Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Display LEAD 1 TRAIL 1 LEAD 2 TRAIL 2 Description Leading edge registration (first page) Trailing edge registration (first page) Leading edge registration (second page) Trailing edge registration (second page) Setting range -32 to 22 -22 to 32 -32 to 22 -22 to 32 Initial setting 0 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0.2 mm 0.2 mm 0.2 mm 0.2 mm

Adjustment: Leading edge registration 1. Select [LEAD 1] or [LEAD 2] using the cursor up/down keys. 2. Press the interrupt key. 3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 4. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-3-11 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
U071 U404 (P.1-3-55)

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-23

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U071

Description Adjustment: Trailing edge registration 1. Select [TRAIL 1] or [TRAIL 2] using the cursor up/down keys. 2. Press the interrupt key. 3. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 4. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2

Figure 1-3-12 5. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
U071 U404 (P.1-3-55)

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-24

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U072

Description Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original. Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used. Adjustment 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Display 1sided 2sided front 2sided back Description DP center line (simplex mode) DP center line (first page of duplex mode) DP center line (second page of duplex mode) Setting range -39 to 39 -39 to 39 -39 to 39 Initial setting 0 0 0 Change in value per step 0.15 mm 0.15 mm 0.15 mm

3. Press the interrupt key. 4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. 5. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original

Copy example 1

Copy example 2

Figure 1-3-13 6. Press the start key. The value is set. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.
U072 U404 (P.1-3-55)

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-25

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U073

Description Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions. Purpose To check scanner operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be changed using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Display ZOOM SIZE LAMP Operating conditions Magnification Original size On and off of the exposure lamp Setting range 100 to 400% See below. 0 (off) or 1 (on)

Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting 8 9 24 36 39 40 41 Paper size A4 B5 11" x 8 1/2" A3 B4 A4R B5R Setting 42 47 52 53 55 56 58 Paper size A5R Folio 11" x 17" 11" x 15" 8 1/2" x 14" 8 1/2" x 11" 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"

4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions. 5. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP. Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the platen and when scanning an original from the DP. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Description DP input light luminosity Setting range 0 to 8 Initial setting 0

Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower. 3. Press the start key. The value is set. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key). Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-26

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U076

Description Executing DP automatic adjustment Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section. Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated. Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section. Method 1. Set a specified original (P/N: AVGR11211F) in the DP. Cut the trailing edge of the original.
5 mm

F
149 ± 1 mm

R

74 ± 1 mm

Figure 1-3-14 2. Press the start key. 3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is displayed. Display CONVEY SPEED LEAD EDGE ADJ DP CENTER Description DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction DP leading edge registration DP original center line

If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. Completion Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed. If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-27

Completion Press the stop/clear key. U087 Description Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. Press the start key. 2. Setting 1. 2. Purpose When using DP. The value is set. Display ON OFF Description DP scanning position adjust mode on DP scanning position adjust mode off Initial setting: ON 3. Press the start key. the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals. When the setting is 35. Description Minimum density to be regarded as dust Setting range 10 to 95 Initial setting 35 Example The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The setting is set. data of the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan data taken when there is no original). Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. 255: black). Setting the reference data for identifying dust Available only when the mode is turned on. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1-3-28 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Press the start key. is displayed. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. If dust is identified. to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position. 1.

A MIP-PG pattern is output. Press the interrupt key. To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit (lateral squareness) 3. 2. Display GRAYSCALE PG pattern to be output Purpose To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics. Method 1. using MIP-PG pattern output (without scanning). 256-LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing. is displayed. MONO-LEVEL To check the drum quality. Completion Press the stop/clear key. use the cousor left/right keys to change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting. 5.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U089 Description Outputting a MIP-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine. Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LINE. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-29 . Press the start key. Press the start key. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output using the cursor up/down keys. Description Output density of MONO-LEVEL 1dot-LINE Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 21 Initial setting 0 0 4. 1 dot-LINE To check fine line reproducibility.

1-3-30 Service Manual Y111000-1 . If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment. Auto adjustment starts. Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065) When this maintenance item is performed. Purpose Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner. Place the specified original (P/N: AVGR05131K) on the contact glass. 3. Completion Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. When adjustment is complete. 2. Method 1. DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops. the settings in U065. determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning. or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items. U066 and U067 are also changed. Should this happen. each adjusted value is displayed. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. U092 Description Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original. adjustment stops and no settings are changed. Press the start key. Display SCN CENTER SCN TIMING SUB SCAN MAIN SCAN Description Scanner center line Scanner leading registration Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction If a problem occurs during auto adjustment.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.

Display TEXT DARKER TEXT LIGHTER Description Setting range Initial setting 0 0 Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. 2. Also used to make copy images darker or lighter. U093 Description Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. Setting: Density in text mode 1. Press the start key. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Press the start key. Method 1. 4. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. To return to the screen for selecting an item. Select the image quality mode using the cursor up/down keys. 4. 2. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-31 . 3. press the stop/clear key. depending on respective image quality modes. Display MIXED DARKER MIXED LIGHTER Description Setting range Initial setting 0 0 Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. Display MIXED TEXT PHOTO FAX TEXT FAX PHOTO Description Density in the text and photo mode Density in text mode Density in photo mode Density in the text in fax mode Density in the photo in fax mode Setting: Density in text and photo mode 1. The value is set. To return to the screen for selecting an item.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Image density Dark Set to LIGHTER Setting: 3 Setting: 0 Set to DARKER Light Light Center Dark Density adjustment Figure 1-3-15 3. 2. The value is set. 3. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed. Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respective image quality modes. Press the start key.

Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. Setting: Density in text in fax mode 1. To return to the screen for selecting an item. 2. 1-3-32 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Display Description Setting range 0 to 6 0 to 6 Initial setting 3 3 FAX PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark FAX PHOTO LIGTER Change in density when manual density is set light Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. 3. 3. 4. Press the start key. Press the start key. The value is set. 4. The value is set. press the stop/clear key. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. 3. U093 Description Setting: Density in photo mode 1. 2. press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. To return to the screen for selecting an item. 4. is displayed. 2. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. To return to the screen for selecting an item. Display FAX TEXT DARKER FAX TEXT LIGHTER Description Change in density when manual density is set dark Change in density when manual density is set light Setting range 0 to 4 0 to 4 Initial setting 2 2 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. Display PHOTO DARKER PHOTO LIGTER Description Setting range Initial setting 0 0 Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger. Setting: Density in photo in fax mode 1. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. and decreasing it makes the change smaller. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key).

U099 Description Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed. 3. Rear of machine Center of machine Front of machine : 123 123 123 : 123 123 123 : 255 255 255 Figure 1-3-16 3. Select an item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. 4. 2. Press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed. Press the start key. 2. Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display DATA B/W LEVEL Description Displaying detection sensor transmission data Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1. Completion Press the stop/clear key. To return to the screen for selecting an item. 2. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-33 . Press the start key. Method 1. Display LEVEL WAIT TIME A4R AREA ORIG AREA SIZE Description Detection sensor threshold value Original size judgment time Threshold value in the main scan direction for A4R detection Original size detection position display (mm) Detected original size display Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 100 220 (mm)/ 240 (mm) 0 to 350 0 to 63 Initial setting 170 30 240 - 3. The value is set. is displayed. press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. To return to the screen for selecting an item. press the stop/clear key. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. Setting 1.

The value is set. from 10 to 2. 2. U100 Description Setting the main high voltage Description Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Start 1. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Description Grid control voltage Setting range 0 to 255 Initial setting 107 Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher. The selected operation starts. The value is set. 2. copy interval Main charging copy quantity correction. and from 5 to 50 bits for correction amount. Setting the main charging copy quantity correction 1. Display INTERVAL COPY CNT MC ADJUST Description Copy interval Copy quantity Correction amount Setting range 1 to 255 (minute) 1 to 255 (10 sheets) 0 to 50 (bit) Initial setting 60 50 10 Copy interval: Sets the time interval from the previous copying. Correction amount: Sets the correction amount for copy quantity correction. press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. 2. the copy quantity counter will be reset. When the copy quantity counter reaches this preset value. 3. Purpose To set the surface potential or check main charging. Select [MC ON] or [LASER ON/OFF] using the cursor up/down keys. correction will start. correction amount Method for main charger output 1. Select [MC DATA] using the cursor up/down keys. Completion Press the stop/clear key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed.000 sheets for copy quantity. Press the start key. Also performs main charging. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. and decreasing it makes the potential lower. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. 3. 3. is displayed. If the time from the previous copying exceeds this preset value. Display MC DATA MC ON LASER ON/OFF INTERVAL COPY CNT MC ADJUST Description Changing the grid control voltage Turning the main charger on Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off Main charging copy quantity correction. 2. 1-3-34 Service Manual Y111000-1 . To stop operation. Set the values in the range from 5 to 120 minutes for copy interval. copy quantity Main charging copy quantity correction. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Copy quantity: Sets the copy quantity from which copy quantity correction starts. Setting the grid control voltage 1. Press the start key. Also changes the setting of main charging copy quantity correction. Also used when reentering data after initializing the set data. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.

Display BIAS C DUTY C BIAS P DUTY P Description Developing bias clock frequency (copier mode) Developing bias clock duty (copier mode) Developing bias clock frequency (printer mode) Developing bias clock duty (printer mode) Setting range 2 to 255 1 to 99 2 to 255 1 to 99 Initial setting 27 45 22 45 Increasing the setting makes the image lighter. 2. copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode (which is activated by pressing the interrupt key). Purpose To check the developing bias and the transfer/separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. decreasing it makes the image darker. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. is displayed. Method 1. 3. 3. Press the start key. 2. Setting the transfer voltage 1. U101 Description Setting the other high voltages Description Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer/separation voltage. The value is set. The screen for executing each item is displayed. The value is set. The value is set. 2. Press the start key. Display SC SEL SC ON TIMING SC OFF TIMING SC MODE Description Separation control voltage Separation charging output ON timing Separation charging output OFF timing Separation control mode Setting range 0 to 2 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 3 Initial setting 1 20 42 2 3. Setting the separation voltage 1. Press the start key. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-35 . Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. Display DEV TC SC Description Setting the developing bias Setting the transfer voltage Setting the separation voltage Setting the developing bias 1. Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. 2. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display TC DATA1 TC DATA2 OFF TIMING ON TIMING Description Transfer control voltage (large size) Transfer control voltage (small size) Transfer charging output OFF timing Transfer charging output ON timing Setting range 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 Initial setting 123 126 33 31 3.

When the installation is complete. Press the start key. check to see if the toner container contains toner and to see if the toner container sensor malfunctions and then try again.. Method 1. [FINISHED] will be displayed if the installation is successful or [NG] will be displayed if it has failed. Press the start key. Installation of toner starts and time (minutes) is indicated until the installation ends. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 1. Purpose To check the drum status.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The drum counter count is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key after operation is complete. Select [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. U110 Description Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking. 3. Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed. Method 1. 2. Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit. is displayed. Press the start key. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. If [NG] is displayed. U130 1-3-36 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Press the start key. Display CONTAINER SENSOR Sensor Toner container sensor (TCS) Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. When the on-status of a sensor is detected. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Method 1. U144 Description Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying. Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting. The value is set. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Display ON OFF Description Toner loaded Toner not loaded Initial setting: OFF 3. Setting 1. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-37 . Display COUNT PERCENT Description Number of pages set Printing ratio Setting range 1 to 50 10 to 40 Initial setting 5 30 3. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. 1. that sensor is displayed in reverse. Setting Available only when the setting is on. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. Turn sensor on and off manually to check the status. is displayed. Purpose To check if the sensor operate correctly. U150 Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on-off status of sensor related to toner. 2. Press the start key. Press the start key. is displayed.

is displayed. The developing counter count is displayed. or clearing a figure. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature. Press the start key. 2. Press the start key. 3. 2. Press the start key. which is used as a reference when correcting the toner control. Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit. can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper. Press the start key. The value is set. 2. Setting 1. Method 1. 2. Select [CLEAR] using the cursor up/down keys. The time is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Select [COUNT] using the cursor up/down keys. Change the count using the numeric key. Select [CLEAR] using the cursor up/down keys. Clearing 1. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. U157 Description Checking/clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking. Completion Press the stop/clear key. is displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. Select [TIME(M)] using the cursor up/down keys. Clearing 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Display 1ST TEMP 2ND TEMP COPY TEMP1 COPY TEMP2 UP TEMP DOWN TEMP Description Primary stabilization fixing temperature Secondary stabilization fixing temperature Copying operation temperature 1 Copying operation temperature 2 Step-up operation temperature Step-down operation temperature Setting range Initial setting 120 to 185 120 to 185 160 to 220 160 to 220 1 to 99 1 to 99 145 165 175 185 1 2 U158 U161 4. However. or solve a fuser problem on thick paper. Method 1. Enter a drive time (in minutes) using the numeric key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes. Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit. Press the start key. 3. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The count is set. The time is cleared. Press the start key. 1-3-38 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Setting 1. is displayed. Purpose Normally no change is necessary.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking. 3.

The forced stabilization mode is entered. 4. U163 U167 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-39 . Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature. The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. is displayed. Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section. Press the start key. 2. Method 1. To exit the forced stabilization mode.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Method 1. U162 Description Stabilizing fixing forcibly Description Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly. and stabilization operation stops regardless of fixing temperature. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Select [COUNT] using the cursor up/down keys. 3. turn the power off and on. is displayed. Select [CLEAR] using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. 3. Press the start key. regardless of fixing temperature. is displayed. Method 1. The count is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Clearing 1. Setting 1. Purpose To check or clear the fuser counts after replacing the fuser unit. The fuser problem data is initialized. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Press [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. 2. Press the start key. Purpose To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature. Change the count using the numeric key. The count is cleared. Checking/clearing the fuser counts Description Displays and clears the fuser counts for checking. 2. The fuser counts is displayed.

Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light. 1-3-40 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Purpose To check the fuser temperature. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. is displayed. U200 Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Display ON OFF Description Fuser phase control present Fuser phase control absent Initial setting: OFF 2. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. U198 Description Setting the fuser phase control Description Sets the use of fuser phase control to reduce electrical noise generated by the machine. U199 Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays the fuser temperature.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Method 1. All the LEDs on the operation panel light. Press the start key. 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the stop/clear key. the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The fuser temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (°C) and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage (%). is displayed. If electrical noise generated by the machine causes flickering of the lights around the machine. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. Display FIX TEMP SURROUND TEMP HUMIDITY Description Fuser temperature (°C) Ambient temperature (°C) Absolute humidity (%) Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. Setting 1. The LEDs turns off. the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity. Method 1. is displayed. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. select fuser phase control to reduces the noise.

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U202

Description Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system. This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting is necessary. Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP. Purpose To check the DP operation. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper. 3. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. Display ADP RADP ADP (NON P) RADP (NON P) Operation With paper, single-sided original With paper, double-sided original Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)

U203

4. Press the start key. The operation starts. 5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter. Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. Display OFF KEY-CARD KEY-COUNTER Description Not installed The key card is installed The key counter is installed

3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-41

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U207

Description Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys. Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel. Method 1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. 2. COUNT1 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights. 3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in that line will light. 4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Limiting job separator output Description Sets a limit of number of output pages from the job separator. Purpose Settings may be modified if curled paper is output from the job separator. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the mode using the cursor up/down keys. Display MODE 0 MODE 1 Description All sizes: 100 sheets A3/Ledger sizes: 50, other sizes: 100

U233

Initial setting: MODE0 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-42

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U243

Description Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors and solenoids in the DP on. Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors or solenoids. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Press the start key. The operation starts. Display F MOT C MOT R MOT RJ SL RP SL Motors and solenoids Original feed motor (OFM) is turned on. Original conveying motor (OCM) is turned on. Original switchback motor (OSBM) is turned on. Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) is turned on. Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) is turned on.

4. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the DP. Purpose To check if respective switches in the DP operate correctly. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted. Display SET SW TMG SW MAT SW COV SW REV SW SZ A SW Switches Original set switch (OSSW) DP timing switch (DPTSW) DP open/close switch (DPOCSW) DP interlock switch (DPILSW) Original switchback switch (OSBSW) Original size length switch (OSLSW)

Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-43

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U245

Description Checking messages Description Displays a list of messages or graphics on the operation panel. Purpose To check the messages or graphics to be displayed. Method 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the item to be displayed using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed. Display Check display messages Check display graphics Description Check the messages Check the graphics

Method to display the messages 1. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time. Select the language using the cursor left/right keys. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Method to display the graphics 1. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each graphic one at a time. Select the background (black or white) using the cursor left/right keys. 2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U246 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the built-in finisher, if furnished. Purpose Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Select the desired cursor position using the cursor up/down keys. 3. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Display FRONT REAR END Description Front side registration cursor stop position Rear side registration cursor stop position Trailing edge registration cursor stop position Setting range 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 Initial setting 4 4 4 Change in value per step 0.566 mm 0.566 mm 0.566 mm

4. Press the start key. The value is set. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-44

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U249

Description Checking the paper ejection to optional devices Description Eject paper to the optional ejection device. When the job separator or the built-in finisher is connected, this operation cannot be run. Purpose To check that paper is ejected properly to the optional ejection device. Method 1. While pressing the feedshift switch by your hand, press the start key. Paper transfer operation starts. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle. Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle. Method 1. Press the start key. The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed. Setting 1. Change the setting using the numeric keys. Description Maintenance cycle Setting range 0 to 9999999 Initial setting 150000

U250

2. Press the start key. The value is set. Clearing 1. Press the reset key. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed. U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count Description Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count. Purpose To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service. Method 1. Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed. Setting 1. Select [COUNT] using the cursor up/down keys. 2. Change the count using the numeric key. 3. Press the start key. The count is set. Clearing 1. Select [CLEAR] using the cursor up/down keys. 2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-3-45

Setting 1. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. China Double DATEMONTHYEAR GEEA 344 1-3-46 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Display JAPAN METRIC INCH EUROPE METRIC ASIA PACIFIC CHINA Description Metric (Japan) specifications Inch (North America) specifications Metric (Europe) specifications Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications China specifications 3. be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination. Select the destination using the cursor up/down keys. Method Press the start key. 4. 253 264 Title Switching between double and single counts Setting the display order of the date Setting the low-power mode Japan Single YEARMONTHDATE ENERGY STAR Inch Double MONTHDATEYEAR ENERGY STAR Europe Metric. 2. The setting is set. Purpose To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PWB or initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020. in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization. Press the start key. Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance item No. The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. Supplement The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. Asia Pacific. U252 Description Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination. Press the start key. To change the initial settings in those items.

if A3/Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count). If incorrect operation occurs. Purpose Used to select. U254 Turning auto start function ON/OFF Description Selects if the auto start function is turned on. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The setting is set. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Display ON OFF Description Auto start function on Auto start function off Initial setting: ON 3. Press the start key. Display SINGLE COUNT DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) DOUBLE COUNT(B4) DOUBLE COUNT(FOLIO/LEGAL) Description Single count for all size paper Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger Double count for B4 size or larger Double count for Folio/Legal size or larger Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) 3. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-47 . Press the start key. U253 Description Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The setting is set. is displayed. Setting 1. Press the start key. 2. Purpose Normally no change is necessary. Setting 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 2. turn the function off: this may solve the problem. according to the preference of the user (copy service provider). is displayed. Select the count system using the cursor up/down keys. Completion Press the stop/clear key.

Purpose Set according to the user preference. copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying. U260 Description Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. etc. 1-3-48 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Display YEAR-MONTH-DATE MONTH-DATE-YEAR DATE-MONTH-YEAR Setting Year/Month/Day Month/Day/Year Day/Month/Year Initial setting: MONTH-DATE-YEAR (for the inch specifications) DATE-MONTH-YEAR (for the metric specifications) 3. Press the start key. The setting is set. the copy timing should be made earlier. 2. U264 Setting the display order of the date Description Selects year. Press the start key. the copy timing should be made later. To prevent this. Completion Press the stop/clear key. copying is charged without a copy being made. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select the copy count timing using the cursor up/down keys. Setting 1. month and day as the order of that appears on lists. Display FEED EJECT Description When secondary paper feed starts When the paper is ejected Initial setting: EJECT 3. Purpose To be set according to user (copy service provider) request. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection. If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections. Setting 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The setting is set. To prevent this. is displayed. Press the start key. Press the start key. Select the desired order using the cursor up/down keys. is displayed.

Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line. is displayed. Setting 1. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-49 . Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like. 2. Description Switching time Setting range 30 to 270 (s) Default setting 30 (s) U277 The setting can be changed by 30 s per step. 2. Press the start key. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. is displayed. Display ON OFF Description Displays the cleaning guidance Not to display the cleaning guidance Initial setting: ON 3. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The setting is set. 3. The value is set. Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the platen when scanning from the DP. Setting 1. 3. changes the setting. Press the start key. 2.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose According to user request. Change the preset value using the numeric keys or cursor left/right keys. The setting is set. U265 Description Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code. Press the start key. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Setting 1. Setting auto application change time Description Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation when the machine is used as a printer. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key.

1 to 3. Select copying (COPY).2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.0 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" x 8 1/2" size for copying printing and fax respectively. Display COPY PRINTER FAX Description Size parameter for copying Size parameter for printing Size parameter for fax Setting range 0. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation. Display PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 Description Cassette Optional first paper feeder (standard for 22 ppm model) Optional second paper feeder Optional third paper feeder 3. Completion Press the stop/clear key. U332 Description Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. Select the paper feed location for the printer using the cursor up/down keys.1 to 3. Setting 1. The setting is set. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys. U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output.0 0. The value is set. A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output.0 1. 0: OFF/1: ON 4. Setting 1. Press the start key. is displayed. Press the start key.1 to 3. 2. Press the start key. Press the start key.0 0. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.0 4. printing (PRT) or fax (FAX) using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.0 Default setting 1. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output. is displayed. 1-3-50 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Completion Press the stop/clear key. Setting 1. The setting is set. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-51 . 2. The setting is set. Purpose According to user request. U342 Description Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Display ON OFF Description Sets restriction on the number of sheets Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Initial setting: ON Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed) Condition When no optional ejection device is installed When the job separator is installed When the built-in finisher is installed Number of sheets 250 150 100 3. Press the start key. Setting 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Press the start key. is displayed. Purpose To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode. sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets. is displayed. Display ON OFF Description Duplex copy Simplex copy Initial setting: OFF 3. 2.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys.

U344 Description Setting the low-power mode Description Changes the control for low-power mode. by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends. is displayed. U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached. Display ENERGY STAR GEEA Description STAR The fixing control temperature is lowered by 20°C/68°F and forced stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat. The fixing control temperature is lowered by 15°C/59°F and forced stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat. Change the setting using the numeric keys. Setting 1. the message is displayed. 2. When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value. 1-3-52 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Select control mode using the cursor up/down keys. The setting is set. is displayed. 2. Completion Press the stop/clear key. the recovery time from low-power or energy saver. Press the start key. The value is set. Purpose To change the time for maintenance due indication. Setting 1. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Display COUNT Description Time for maintenance due indication (Remaining number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends) Setting range 0 to 9999 3. Purpose According to user request. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Initial setting: ENERGY STAR (inch specifications)/GEEA (metric specifications) 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. Press the start key. selects which has priority.

1 mm 0. 4. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. 5. Press the start key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.4 to 10. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. U402 U403 (P.0 mm) Printer right margin (2.0 Initial setting 3. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode.0 3.0±1. Adjustment 1.0 Change in value per step 0. is displayed. The value is set.0 -3.0 4. Display LEAD AC TRAIL Description Printer leading edge margin Printer left and right margin Printer trailing edge margin Setting range 0 to 10.1-3-55) Completion Press the stop/clear key. If the image is still incorrect. Printer leading edge margin (3. U402 Description Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing.0 to 10. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.1 mm 3.1 mm 0.5±1.5±1. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-53 . Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment.0±1. Press the start key to output a test pattern.0 mm) Printer trailing edge margin (3.1-3-54) U404 (P. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower. Press the interrupt key. 2. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key.0 mm) Figure 1-3-17 6.0 mm) Printer left margin (2.0 -5.

5+1.0 mm) Scanner trailing edge margin (3.0 0 to 10. is displayed. The value is set. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.1 mm 0.0 mm) Scanner right margin (2.0±2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.0 Initial setting 2.1 mm 0.0 2.5 mm) Scanner left margin (2.0±2.1-3-55) Completion Press the stop/clear key. U403 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the platen. Display A MARGIN B MARGIN C MARGIN D MARGIN Description Scanner left margin Scanner leading edge margin Scanner right margin Scanner trailing edge margin Setting range 0 to 10. Scanner leading edge margin (3.5 mm) Figure 1-3-18 6. Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Adjustment 1.5+1.0 2.0 Change in value per step 0.1 mm 0.1 mm 3.0 0 to 10. U403 U404 (P. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. If the image is still incorrect. perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode. 5. 4.5/-2.0 0 to 10. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect. 2. Press the start key. 1-3-54 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.0 3. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.5/-2.

U404 Description Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.0 Initial setting 2. Leading edge margin (3. U402 (P. Completion Press the stop/clear key.1-3-54) U404 Adjustment 1.1-3-53) U403 (P.1 mm 0.0±2. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Display A MARGIN B MARGIN C MARGIN D MARGIN Description DP left margin DP leading edge margin DP right margin DP trailing edge margin Setting range 0 to 10. Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.1 mm 0. and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.5/-2.0 mm) Trailing edge margin (3. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-55 . 5. is displayed.5 mm) Figure 1-3-19 6.0 2. The value is set. ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.0 3.5+1. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. Increasing the value makes the margin wider. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. 2.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 10.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.1 mm 3.0 mm) Right margin (2.0 2.5+1. Caution Before making this adjustment.1 mm 0. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the optional DP is used.0±2.0 Change in value per step 0.5 mm) Left margin (2. 4.5/-2.0 0 to 10. Press the start key.

The value is set. Press the interrupt key. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. For copy example 2.0 Initial setting 0.1 mm 2. Purpose Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying. decrease the value. Completion Press the stop/clear key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No.1-3-54) U071 (P. is displayed.1-3-12) U402 (P. 1-3-56 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Press the start key.0 to 2.1-3-53) U066 (P. For copy example 1.0 Change in value per step 0. U034 (P. Description Leading edge registration for memory image printing Setting range -2.1-3-23) U404 (P.1-3-55) U407 Adjustment 1. increase the value. 4. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-3-20 5. Caution Before making this adjustment. ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.1-3-19) U403 (P. 3. U407 Description Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying.

U504 Description Initializing the scanner NIC Description Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default. 3. The screen for executing is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Select [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Method 1. the error may be cleared. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-57 . however. By delaying the error detection timing. Press the start key. 2. The value is set. Purpose To change the preset value if a communication error occurs after connection to a computer continues for a long time. Setting 1. Purpose To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments. 2. is displayed. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized. Setting the time out Description Sets the communication timeout time for connection to a computer. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. 3. Press the start key. If the error is not cleared after the preset value is changed. Press the start key. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. Description Timeout time Setting range 10 to 120 (s) Initial setting 10 U506 The setting can be changed by 10 s per step. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. return the preset value to the initial value.

2. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys. the corresponding count is not displayed. Method 1. U901 Description Checking copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays and clears copy counts by paper feed locations. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. The individual counter cannot be cleared. Select [ALL] using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Purpose To check the paper jam status. is displayed. 4. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The count is cleared. 3. Display BYP PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 DUP Paper feed locations MP tray Cassette Optional first paper feeder (standard for 22 ppm model) Optional second paper feeder Optional third paper feeder Duplex section When an optional paper feed device is not installed. Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts. Press the start key. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. 2. 1-3-58 Service Manual Y111000-1 . However. PF2. Clearing 1. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys. Display COUNT TOTAL COUNT Description Displays/clears the jam counts Displays the total jam counts Method: Clears the jam counts 1. and 4 are displayed only and cannot be cleared. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 3. Press the start key. The count is cleared. Press the start key. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. 2. The screen for executing is displayed. Method 1.

Select [ALL] using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the start key. 4. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. 2. is displayed. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP No. Display DP FINISHER DP Display ADP RADP Finisher Display CP CNT STAPLE BUNDLE EJECT Description No. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys. Press the start key. Select the device. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The count is cleared. 3. Method 1. U905 Checking counts by optional devices Description Displays the counts of DP or finisher. is displayed. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts. Press the start key. Purpose To check the service call code status by types. Method 1. 2. Completion Press the stop/clear key. of copies that has passed Frequency the stapler has been activated Frequency the bundle discharge has been activated Description No. 2.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Purpose To check the use of DP and finisher. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP Description Counts of optional DP Counts of optional finisher Completion Press the stop/clear key. Display COUNT TOTAL COUNT Description Displays/clears the service call counts Displays the total service call counts Method: Clears the service call counts 1. U904 Description Checking/clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types. 3. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-59 . the count of which is to be checked using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for executing is displayed. The count of the selected device is displayed. Press the start key. The individual counter cannot be cleared. Press the start key.

Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the casettes or other sections. Press the start key. 3. Method 1. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet. The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main power switch is turned on. The screen for total count value is displayed. is displayed. Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value. Completion Press the stop/clear key. U908 U910 U911 1-3-60 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Select [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed. 4. Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Select [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared. Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes. 2. is displayed.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. is displayed. Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts. Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. Method 1. To clear all counts. and the related parts are serviced. select [ALL]. 2. Press the start key. Method 1. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U906 Description Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control. Select the paper size using the cursor up/down keys. Clearing 1. Press the start key. Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service. Purpose To check the total counter value. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

4. 7. 3. Fax control PWB flash memory error. CF write error. 10. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine. Display SRAM→CF:BKUP CF→SRAM:BKUP SRAM→CF:DIAL CF→SRAM:DIAL Description Writing the backup data of fax control PWB Reading the backup data of fax control PWB Writing the backup data of fax dial information Reading the backup data of fax dial information 8. 2. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine. Reading or writing is executed. CF data is incompatible. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. 9. Press and hold on the Copier key until the message "Please wait. See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 below. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-61 . Refit the slot cover. Setting 1. Press the power key on the operation panel. Enter the maintenance item. 6. If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. Detects call for service on main PWB. Bad CF data (Checksum error) CF read error. Select the item using the cursor up/down keys. 11. CF error. turn the main power switch on. Communication error. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. switch off the main power switch. Detects call for service on engine PWB. While pressing the copier key. Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 Code 0102 0103 0104 0105 01FF 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0212 Description Detects call for service on fax control PWB. Press the start key. Remove the screw and remove the slot cover. U917 Description Setting backup data reading/writing Description Stores backup data from the fax control PWB (when an optional fax kit is installed) into CompactFlash or reads the data from CompactFlash. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off." disappears. Purpose To store and write data when replacing the PWB. No data in CF card. No CF card. and the screen displays the result. Press the power key on the operation panel. switch off the main power switch. Press the start key. 5. Connect the power plug.

Select [ALL] using the cursor up/down keys. The individual counter cannot be cleared. 2. Press the start key. printer counter and fax counter are displayed. Checking/clearing the system error counts Description Displays and clears the count value of system error. item is displayed. The count for system error detection by type is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check the copy counts. Method 1. The current counts of copy counter. Press the start key. Method 1. The count is cleared. Press the start key. is displayed. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. Clearing 1. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 2. U925 1-3-62 Service Manual Y111000-1 . U920 Description Checking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable parts.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Purpose To check the system error status by types. Completion Press the stop/clear key.

and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed. U926 Description Rewriting FAX program Description Downloads the fax program and fax fonts when installing an optional fax kit. Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine. If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. Enter the maintenance item. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. turn the main power switch on. Connect the power plug. switch off the main power switch. Press the power key on the operation panel.1-3-61." disappears. switch off the main power switch. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-63 . Refit the slot cover. If the operation was successful: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE 0000 If the operation failed: EXECUTE 0100 CHECK SUM **** CODE XXXX Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure. 9. Purpose To run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts. Remove the screw and remove the slot cover. 6.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Press and hold on the Copier key until the message "Please wait. 7. Press the start key. 2. Setting 1. and after verifying the power indicator has gone off. While pressing the copier key. Then. 10. 4. See Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926 on P. 5. Press the power key on the operation panel. 3. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 8.

1-3-64 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. Select [EXECUTE] using the cursor up/down keys. Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Method 1. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared. [CANNOT EXECUTE] is displayed if the count cannot be cleared. is displayed. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine. is displayed. Display ON OFF Description Automatic toner install function ON Automatic toner install function OFF U928 U931 Initial setting: OFF 3. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. U927 Description Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only) Description Resets all of the counts back to 0. Press the start key. Press the start key. 2. Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The setting is set. The current machine life counts is displayed. Press the start key. Purpose Changed to off when deactivating automatic toner installation. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Setting the automatic toner install Description Sets automatic toner installation on or off when power is turned on. 2. Press the start key. is displayed. Setting 1. Completion Press the stop/clear key. 3. Method 1. Press the start key. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. Purpose To check the machine life counts.

Press the start key. The setting is set. Setting 1. Setting 1. Purpose To check the toner area code. is displayed. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. Press the start key. Press the start key. the larger the deflection. Press the interrupt key. U969 Checking of toner area code Description Displays the toner area code. the smaller the deflection. Press the start key. The value is set. oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose Use this mode if an original non-feed jam. 5. 6. Display 100 Aut Description 100% magnification Auto magnification selection Initial setting: 100% magnification 3. 2. is displayed. Select the magnification using the cursor up/down keys. is displayed. Completion Press the stop/clear key. If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs. Press the strat key. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy. U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the deflection generated when the DP is used. If wrinkling of original occurs. Completion Press the stop/clear key. The toner area code is displayed. Change the setting value using the cursor left/right keys. U941 Description Setting the default magnification ratio of the default cassette Description Sets the default magnification ratio when paper selection of copy default setting is set to the default cassette. Display FEED MOT REV MOT Description Deflection in the original feed motor Deflection in the original switchback motor Setting range -10 to 20 -10 to 20 Initial setting 0 0 3. Method 1. The greater the value. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. 4.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. decrease the value. Purpose To be set according to user request. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Completion Press the stop/clear key. the smaller the value. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-65 . increase the setting value.

Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replacement. 2. Select [TIME] using the cursor up/down keys. Setting 1. The accumulated time is cleared. is displayed. Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner. 1-3-66 Service Manual Y111000-1 . The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Press the start key. 2. Completion Press the stop/clear key. Select [CLEAR] using the cursor up/down keys. Display COPY FAX NWS Description Scanner operation count for copying Scanner operation count for fax Network scanner operation count U991 Completion Press the stop/clear key. Press the start key. is displayed. Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes. Clearing 1. 3. Change the accumulated time using the numeric key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. The accumulated time is set. Method 1. clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light. Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. The screen for the scanner operation count is desplayed. Press the start key. Method 1. U990 Description Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays.

Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the cursor up/down keys. Method 1. Press the start key. is displayed. 2. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. Press the interrupt key. Display PG1 PG pattern to be output Purpose Leading edge registration adjustment Center line adjustment Margin adjustment PG2 Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment PG3 Driving unevenness of drum 3. 4. used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-67 . Press the start key. Completion Press the stop/clear key.2KJ/2KH Maintenance item No. A VTC-PG pattern is output. Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments. U993 Description Outputting a VTC-PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the machine.

Select [Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. Make MP tray settings (page 1-3-73). Select [Counter check] and then press the enter key. the machine is equipped with a management function which can be operated by users (mainly by the administrator). Press the reset key. Make copy default settings (page 1-3-70). End 1-3-68 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Enter the management code. Select [Language] and then press the enter key. Press the reset key.2KJ/2KH 1-3-2 Management mode In addition to a maintenance function for service. In this management mode. Select [MP Tray Setting] and then press the enter key. Execute job accounting items (page 1-3-69). Make machine default settings (page 1-3-71). Select [Machine default] and then press the enter key. Enter the management code. Enter the management code. settings such as default settings can be changed. Set the language (page 1-3-73). Select [Copy default] and then press the enter key. (1) Using the management mode Start Press the system menu/counter key. Press the reset key. Output the report (page 1-3-73). Select the [End] and press the enter key. Press the reset key. Check the counter (page 1-3-73). Select [Print report] and then press the enter key.

4. Change the limit of use. Set the lmit of use. Fax job accounting Note: This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed in the machine. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. 2. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. and clear the counter for all accounts. 3. Select [Job Accounting Def. 4. [Stop after job done] or [Only warning]and then press the enter key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [Job Accounting On/Off] and then press the enter key. 3.] and then press the enter key. 3. Select [Prnt Job Account. 2. 2. Press the enter key. 1. Printer job accounting 1. Select [Job Accounting Def.] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Job Accounting Def. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 4. 1. 1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Changing limit of use 1. 2. 3.2KJ/2KH (2) Setting the job accounting Registering a new account Registers ID-codes and the limit of use for each account. to stop the operation from the next job or to display a warning message onle. Individual account management Checks the output count and/or clears the counter for individual accounts. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 3.] and then press the enter key. Select the ID-code to delete and then press the enter key. Set. 3. 4. output the job accounting report. Select [Print report] and then press the enter key. The output counts of individual accounts are displayed.] and then press the enter key. Enter the ID-code (up to 8 digits) using the numeric keys. Select [Change limit in use] using the cursor up/ down keys and then press the enter key. when the limit of count that has been set with the function of the limit of use is exceeded. Select [Each Job Accouning TL] and then press the enter key. All account management You can browse the total output count. Select [Counter clear] and then press the enter key. Select [Delete] and then press the enter key. Set. 2. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter key. The management report is printed out. Deleting an account 1. Select the ID-code to change and then press the enter key. 2. Operation against excess over limit Determines whether to stop output by prohibiting immediately use of the machine.] and then press the enter key. Select [Edit Job Accounting] using the cursor up/ down keys and then press the enter key. Select [Stop job immediately]. Select [Job Accounting Total] and then press the enter key. 5. Select [Copy Job Account. Scanner job accounting Note: This setting is only available when the optional network scanner board is installed in the machine. Select [New registration] and then press the enter key. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press the enter key. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Select [Excess limit Set. Select [Fax Job Accountng] and then press the enter key.] and then press the enter key. Copier job accounting 1. 2. 2. Enabling job accounting 1. Select [Scanner Job Accnt] and then press the enter key. 2. Set. Select the ID-code to clear and then press the enter key. Set.] and then press the enter key. 3. 1. 3. Set. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 1. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-69 .] and then press the enter key.

2. 1. Select [Text+Photo]. 1. select the desired paper type and then press the enter key. Select [Txt Ori Density] and then press the enter key. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Adjust the density and then press the enter key. Select [Orig Image] and then press the enter key.] and then press the enter key. Original image quality Selects the original image quality at power-on. 1. 2. Select [Collate] and then press the enter key. Auto density adjustment Adjusts the overall density level for the auto density mode. Select [EcoPrint] and then press the enter key. 1.Auto dens] and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Manual] or [Auto] and then press the enter key. Density adjustment for Text + Photo originals Adjusts the median density value when the text+photo mode is selected for the image quality. Select [Default cassette] and then press the entrer key.2KJ/2KH (3) Copy default Density mode Selects the exposure mode at power-on. Adjust the density and then press the enter key. Select [Adj. Select [Background adjst] and then press the enter key. Select [100%] or [Auto %] and then press the enter key. 1. [Photo] or [Text] and then press the enter key. Density adjustment for Text originals Adjusts the median density value when the text mode is selected for the image quality. Select [Paper type(Auto)] and then press the enter key. 1. 2. Default magnification Sets whether or not the appropriate magnification ratio to be calculated automatically when selecting the size of copy paper. Select [Default magnif. 2. 2. Select the drawer that will be used with priority. Setting range: 1 to 7 Paper selection Sets whether the copier will automatically select the same size of copy paper as the original once an original is set. 2. 2. 1. Select [Auto dens(OCR)] and then press the enter key. 2. 2. 1. 1. Settings: Cassette 1/Cassette 2/Cassette 3/ Cassette 4 Density adjustment for Photo originals Adjusts the median density value when the photo mode is selected for the image quality. Select [Photo Ori Dnsity] and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 7 Default cassette Sets one cassette that will be selected automatically regardless of the size of paper loaded in that cassette. Eco print mode ON/OFF Determines whether or not the eco print mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. If selected [On]. Select [Exposure Mode] and then press the enter key. 1. 2. Setting range: 1 to 7 Paper type (Auto paper selection mode) Selects the types of paper that will be available for selection under the APS (Auto Paper Selection) mode. or whether the designated default drawer will be automatically selected. Setting range: 1 to 7 Background color adjustment Adjust the ground color of the copied paper. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter key. 1. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 1. Adjust the density and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the density and then press the enter key. Select [Paper Select] and then press the enter key. Select [Auto] or [Default cassette] and then press the enter key. 1. 1-3-70 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Setting range: 1 to 7 Collate copying Determines whether or not the Sort mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. Setting range: 1 to 5 Auto density adjustment (OCR) Adjusts the overall density level for scanning with OCR (Optical Character Recognition) software when using the optional scanner functions of this machine. 2. 3. Select [Txt+Photo Dens] and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the density and then press the enter key.

Margin width default value Determines the default value of the location and width of the margins in the margin mode. Select paper type and then press the enter key. 2. Black streaking reduction processing Reduces black lines that may be caused when the DP is used. Select one of the [Paper Type (1st) to (4th)] and then press the enter key. Select paper weight and then press the enter key. Select [Corr. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 2. Select one of the [Custom 1 to 8] and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 999 Paper weight for paper type Sets the paper weight for each paper type. Select [BorderEraseWidth] and then press the enter key. 1. 2. Select the paper type and then press the enter key. Duplex print for paper type Sets whether or not each custom type of paper (custom 1 to custom 8) will be available for use in duplex printing. 3. 2. 2. Select [Copy Limit] and then press the enter key. 1.2KJ/2KH Offset copying Determines whether or not the offset copy will be the default setting in the initial mode. [Weak] or [Strong] and then press the enter key. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch specifications) 1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric specifications) MP tray confirmation display 1. 2. 1. Select [Match Print Direction] or [Fast Mode] and then press the enter key. Sets the copy limit and then press the enter key. 2. Select [On/All types of paper]. Select [Auto Detection Metric]. 2. Custom paper type Sets whether or not to match the orientation in onesided printing and two-sided printing. 1. 2. Select one of the [Paper Size (1st) to (4th)] and then press the enter key. Border erase width default value Determines the default value for the width of the border to be erased in the two border erase modes. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-71 . Sets the margin widths and then press the enter key. Select one of the [Check MP Tray] and then press the enter key. Paper type (cassettes 1 to 4) Sets the type of paper that is loaded in cassettes 1 through 4. (4) Machine default Auto cassette switching Turns automatic cassette switching ON or OFF. type] and then press the enter key. Select [Offset] and then press the enter key. 1. Sets the widths and then press the enter key. Limit of number of copies Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy sets) that can be made at a time. 1. 1. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Black line] and then press the enter key. type (Weight)] and then press the enter key. Select [Auto Cassette SW] and then press the enter key. 1. Select [P. [Auto Detection Inch] or a paper size and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Margin Width] and then press the enter key. 2. Select [Special P. 1. 1. Setting range: 1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch specifications) 1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric specifications) Paper size (cassettes 1 to 4) Sets the size of paper that is loaded in cassettes 1 through 4. 2. 3. Select [Auto Rotation] and then press the enter key. 1. Auto rotation copy Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation mode will be the default setting in the initial mode. [On/Only same paper type] or [Off] and then press the enter key. type (Duplex)] and then press the enter key. 1. Select [None]. 2. Select [P.

Setting range: 10 to 270 s Silent mode Sets whether or not to use the silent mode which shortens the length of time that the laser data writing motor continues to spin after each copy job is finished. 2. Auto low power time Sets the time that elapses before the low power mode is automatically activated. Auto sleep Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep function. Setting range: 1 to 240 min (Inch specifications) 1 to 120 mim (metric specifications) Date and time Sets the current date and time. Select [Display Contrast] and then press the enter key. Auto sleep time Sets the time that elapses before the auto sleep function. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the current date and time. 2. 1. Setting range: 1 to 7 Administrator management code change Changes the administrator management code. direction] and then press the enter key. Select [Low power time] and then press the enter key. 1. This setting is displayed only on the inch specification model. 2. Key sound Sets whether or not the operation panel will emit a beep sound each time a key is pressed. Select output location and then press the enter key. 2. Enter a new 4-digit administrator management code using the numeric keys. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. 2. 2. This setting is only available when the optional fax kit is installed. 1. 2. 1. 2. finisher or job separator are installed in the machine. Adjust the contrast and then press the enter key. 2. 1. Select [Auto Clear Time] and then press the enter key. Select [Date/Time] and then press the enter key. Select [Auto Clear] and then press the enter key. Auto clear time Sets the time that elapses from completion of copying to activation of the auto cler function. Fax output destination Sets where incoming faxes will be ejected. Select [Auto Sleep] and then press the enter key. Sets low power time and then press the enter key. 2. Sets the time and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Copy Otput Destn] and then press the enter key. Select [Admin. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key.2KJ/2KH Original orientation Sets the default original orientation. Sets sleep mode type and then press the enter key. 2. This setting is only available when the optional fax kit. 1. Select [Orig. Select output location and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Key sound On/Off] and then press the enter key. This setting is only available when the optional finisher or job separator are installed in the machine. 1. Select [Fax Otput Destn] and then press the enter key. Code] and then press the enter key. Select [End] and then press the enter key. 1. 1-3-72 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 1. 2. 1. Select [Copy mode] or [Fax mode] and then press the enter key. Copy output destination Sets the paper output location with priority for copying. Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Main mode] and then press the enter key. 1. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter key. Setting range: 1 to 240 mm (Inch specifications) 1 to 120 mm (metric specifications) Display contrast adjustment Adjust the display contrast. Auto clear Sets whether or not to have the auto clear function. 2. Select [Sleep mode time] and then press the enter key. Default operation mode Sets whether the display that appears after power is turned on to the machine will be the one for the copy operation mode or for the fax operation mode. Select [Silent Mode] and then press the enter key.

Select [Print Report] and then press the enter key. Select the report to print out and then press the enter key. 2. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-3-73 . Select paper size. Select paper type and then press the enter key. select [Universal Size]. If the paper size is unknown or no particular paper size setting is required. German. 1. Select [End] and then press the enter key.2KJ/2KH Machine administrator management code change Changes the four-digit management code for the security administrator of the other machine.. 2. English. Select [Print counter report] and then press the enter key to print out a counter report. 2. Select [MachineAdminCode] and then press the enter key. Select [Output count] or [Scan count] and then press the enter key. (6) Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report Checks the total count of copies. Select [Language] and then press the enter key. French and Spanish Metric specifications English. Select the language to use and then press the enter key. 2. 2. 4. (8) Language setting Switches the language to be displayed on the operation panel. 1. 3. Select [Other Regular Size] and then press the enter key. Select [Counter check] and then press the enter key. Available languages: Inch specifications Japanese. 4. When setting a size. 2. Press the enter key. etc. Select paper type and then press the enter key. 1. and prints out the information as a counter report. (7) Report output Prints out one of the status report. 1. 3. (5) MP Tray setting Paper size and type Sets the paper size and paper type for the MP tray settings. Setting range: (Inch specifications) Width: 3 7/8" to 11 5/8" Length: 5 7/8" to 17" (Metric specifications) Width: 98 to 297 mm Length: 148 to 432 mm 3. Spanish and Italian Selecting other standard sizes Sets a special standard size. turn on the size input and use the left/right cursor key to select the paper size. Select paper size and then press the enter key. 1. French. 1. [Copy report] [Machine report] [Coverage report] The selected status report will be printed out. Enter a new security administrator management code using the numeric keys.

2KJ/2KH This page is intentionally left blank. 1-3-74 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel. To remove paper jammed in the machine. To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher. detach the finisher from the machine. 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Figure 1-4-1 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Misfeed in cassette Misfeed in first paper feeder Misfeed in second paper feeder Misfeed in third paper feeder Misfeed in MP tray Misfeed in paper conveying section Misfeed in eject section (job separator or built-in finisher) Misfeed in document processor Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-1 . open the front cover. open the document processor top cover. left cover or pull the cassette out. To remove original jammed in the optional DP. Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on. Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.2KJ/2KH 1-4 Troubleshooting 1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection (1) Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs.

2KJ/2KH (2) Paper misfeed detection conditions OSBSW DPTSW PCSW ESW FSSW DUP PCSW RCL RSW MP SOL PFCL CPFCL1 CFSW1 CPFCL2 CFSW2 CPFCL3 Figure 1-4-2 1-4-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

2290 ms 1953 ms 1953 ms 2243 ms 1916 ms 1916 ms 1916 ms 16 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying section 2 Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn on within specified time of cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) turning on. Left cover is opened in prior to the cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) is turned off.2KJ/2KH Section System Description 00 No paper feed Conditions The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying system is on. 30 s Specified time 1570 ms The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within the 1327 ms specified time of paper paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within specified time of cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) turning on. Left cover is opened in prior to the cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) is turned off. The document processor is opened while originals fed from the document processor are scanned. Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn off within specified time of cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) turning on. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-3 . The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within the specified time of paper MP solenoid (MPSOL) turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn off within specified time of cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) turning off. Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time of arrival of paper at the registration section. Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 2 (CPFCL2) turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry. 5907 ms 20 Multiple sheets in MP tray The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the 1570 ms specified time of paper MP solenoid (MPSOL) turning on. 04 Cover open 05 Secondary paper feed does not start Paper feed section 10 No paper feed from MP tray 11 No paper feed from cassette 12 No paper feed from first paper feeder 13 No paper feed from second paper feeder 14 No paper feed from third paper feeder 15 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying section 1 Cover is open during copying. Cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 3 (CPFCL3) turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within the specified time of cassette paper paper feed clutch 1 (CPFCL1) turning on and cannot be detected at the same timing even after retry.

The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning on. The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. Cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 3 (CPFCL3) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the specified time of paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) turning off. Fuser section 40 Misfeed in fuser section (MP tray) The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.2KJ/2KH Section Paper feed section Description 21 Multiple sheets in cassette Conditions The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 2 (CPFCL2) turning on. The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. which is not the one indicating start of secondary paper feed. Specified time 5907 ms 1327 ms 5907 ms 2290 ms 22 Multiple sheets in first paper feeder 23 Multiple sheets in second paper feeder 5907 ms 1953 ms 24 Multiple sheets in third paper feeder 5907 ms 1953 ms Paper conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration/ transfer section - 2523 ms 2243 ms 2243 ms 1589 ms 2766 ms 2766 ms 2766 ms 2766 ms 2766 ms 41 Misfeed in fuser section (cassette) 42 Misfeed in fuser section (first paper feeder) 43 Misfeed in fuser section (second paper feeder) 2766 ms 1-4-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 . The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. A message. Cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. Cassette feed switch 2 (CFSW2) does not turn off within specified time of its turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) turning on (paper feed from third paper feeder). The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the specified time of cassette paper feed clutch 1 (CPFCL1) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the cassette feed switch 1 (CFSW1) turning on (paper feed from second paper feeder). is received when the machine waits for start of secondary paper feed.

The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. 54 Misfeed in feedshift section (first paper feeder) The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. 53 Misfeed in feedshift section (cassette) The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. 55 Misfeed in feedshift section (second paper feeder) The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. 51 Misfeed in job separator eject section The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. 2766 ms 2766 ms 2056 ms 2056 ms 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms Feedshift section 52 Misfeed in feedshift section (MP tray) Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-5 . The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on.2KJ/2KH Section Fuser section Description 44 Misfeed in fuser section (third paper feeder) 45 Misfeed in fuser section (duplex section) Eject section Conditions The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. Specified time 2766 ms 2766 ms 50 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified Misfeed in eject section time of the registration switch (RSW) turning off. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

2KJ/2KH Section Feedshift section Description 56 Misfeed in feedshift section (third paper feeder) Conditions The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. DP timing switch (DPTSW) turns off within the specified time of period of the original conveying motor (OCM) turning on in the simplex or duplex mode. section (duplex section) The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. even if retry operation is performed five times. The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. Specified time 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms 2056 ms 1364 ms 2766 ms 5907 ms 3037 ms 3037 ms 3037 ms 1589 ms 1589 ms - 9900 pulses During the secondary original feed in the simplex mode. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within specified time of paper switchback operation. 61 Misfeed in duplex eject section The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning on. DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn off within specified time of the original conveying motor (OCM) turning on. The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within specified time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) turning off. primary original feed is not performed. DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn on within specified time of the original switchback motor (OSBM) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. DP timing switch (DPTSW) does not turn off within specified time of the original conveying motor (OCM) turning on. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on. The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off. The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on. During original conveying in the duplex mode. Duplex section 60 Misfeed in duplex paper conveying section The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. Document processor 70 No original feed 71 An original jam in the original conveying section 1 72 An original size error jam 73 An original jam in the original conveying section 2 74 An original jam in the original conveying section 3 During primary feed of the second original in the simplex or duplex mode. 57 The job eject switch (JBESW) does not turn on within Misfeed in feedshift specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on. 1145 pulses 9900 pulses 2300 pulses 1-4-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 . During secondary original feed in the duplex mode.

Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the document finisher within specified time of the paper conveying switch (PCSW) turning on. the original switchback switch (OSBSW) does not turn on within specified time of the original conveying motor (OCM) turning on. Specified time 10700 pulses - Finisher 80 Jam between the finisher and machine 81 Finisher paper entry nonarrival jam 83 Finisher paper entry jam 84 Finisher eject jam 15 s 2598 ms The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off 1869 ms + Paper within specified time of its turning on when paper is con. The document processor or document processor top cover is opened during original feeding. 2570 ms 1869 ms + Paper length Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-7 .length veyed to the process table from the paper conveying unit. The paper conveying switch (PCSW) is not turned on within the specified time when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the process table. The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the process table. The original set switch (OSSW) or original size length switch (OSLSW) turns on when starting the original paper feed. The paper conveying switch (PCSW) is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received.2KJ/2KH Section Document processor Description 75 An original jam in the original switchback section 78 Document processor cover open Conditions During original switchback in the duplex mode.

Defective registration switch. Check (see page 1-4-32). Corrective measures Check visually and remove it. feedshift switch Change the paper. eject switch. Electrical problem with the MP solenoid. Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace switch. (3) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from cassette). Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off. Jam code 12 Paper is extremely curled.Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. Change the paper. Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Run maintenance item U032 and select the MP solenoid to be turned on and off. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Broken registration switch actuator. Jam code 11 Paper is extremely curled. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled. Broken registration switch actuator. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Defective registration switch. Defective switch. Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. eject switch or feedshift switch. Check (see page 1-4-32). Check if the paper feed pul. ley. Check if the MP paper feed pulley is deformed. Check if the paper feed pul. Check visually and replace switch. Broken registration switch actuator. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions. if any. (2) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from MP tray). Check visually and replace switch.Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. ley.2KJ/2KH (3) Paper misfeeds Problem (1) A paper jam in the paper feed. separation pulley or forwarding pulley is deformed. Check the status and remedy if necessary. conveying or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned on. Causes/check procedures A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around registration switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Registration switch. Defective registration switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. separation pulley or forwarding pulley is deformed. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. (4) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from first paper feeder). Change the paper. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 1. 1-4-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Check if the MP solenoid malfunctions. Check (see page 1-4-32). Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light.

2 or 3. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch. Jam code 13 Causes/check procedures Paper is extremely curled. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace switch. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 3 malfunctions. Broken cassette feed switch 2 actuator. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 3. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. ley. Jam code 14 Paper is extremely curled. Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off.Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 2. Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off. Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. 2 Run maintenance item U032 and select the clutch to be turned on and off. Registration switch. Defective cassette feed switch 1. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-9 . Check visually and replace switch. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace. Change the paper. separation pulley or forwarding pulley is deformed. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). cassette paper feed clutch 1. Change the paper. separation pulley or forwarding pulley is deformed. Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 1 on and off manually. Broken cassette feed switch 1 actuator. Defective switch. Check if the paper feed pul. ley. Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 2 on and off manually. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). cassette feed switch 1 or 2 actuator. Corrective measures Check if the paper feed pul.Check visually and replace any deformed pulley. Defective cassette feed switch 2. cassette feed switch 1. Check if the paper feed clutch. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Jam code 15 Broken registration switch. 2 or 3 malfunctions. (6) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from third paper feeder).2KJ/2KH Problem (5) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (no paper feed from second paper feeder). cassette paper feed clutch 1. Check visually and replace switch. (7) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (misfeed in vertical paper conveying section 1).

Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Check visually and replace. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers. (10) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in cassette). Broken registration switch actuator. Check if the MP solenoid malfunctions. 1-4-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to be turned on and off. Check visually and replace.2KJ/2KH Problem (8) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (misfeed in vertical paper conveying section 2). Jam code 16 Causes/check procedures Broken cassette feed switch 1 or 2 actuator. Check visually and replace. Check visually and replace. cassette paper feed clutch 1 or 2 malfunctions. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check (see page 1-4-32). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check visually and replace switch. (9) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in MP tray). Jam code 21 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch. 2 Run maintenance item U032 and select the clutch to be turned on and off. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other. Defective registration switch. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Cassette feed switch 1. Broken registration switch actuator. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Corrective measures Check visually and replace switch. Check visually and replace. Run maintenance item U032 and select the MP solenoid to be turned on and off. Check (see service manual of paper feeder). Defective switch. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Defective registration switch. Jam code 20 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Check if the paper feed clutch malfunctions. Check if the paper feed clutch. Electrical problem with the MP solenoid. Check (see page 1-4-32). cassette paper feed clutch 1 or 2. Electrical problem with the paper feed clutch.

(12) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in second paper feeder). Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 3 to be turned on and off. Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 1 on and off manually. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-11 . Check (see page 1-4-32). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check visually and replace. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 1. Check visually and replace. Jam code 22 Causes/check procedures Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions. Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions. Broken cassette feed switch 1 actuator. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 2. Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and off manually. Defective registration switch. Check visually and replace. Check visually and replace switch. Defective cassette feed switch 2. Broken cassette feed switch 2 actuator. Defective cassette feed switch 1. Check (see page 1-4-32). Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Jam code 24 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check (see page 1-4-32). Check if the cassette paper feed clutch 3 malfunctions. Broken registration switch actuator.2KJ/2KH Problem (11) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in first paper feeder). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Electrical problem with the cassette paper feed clutch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn cassette feed switch 2 on and off manually. Jam code 23 Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check visually and replace switch. (13) A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying (multiple sheets in third paper feeder). Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 2 to be turned on and off. Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U032 and select the cassette paper feed clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check if the right and left registration rollers contact each other. Corrective measures Check visually and replace.

Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Broken registration switch. Defective switch. 42. Defective switch. Check if the heat roller separation claws are dirty or deformed. Jam code 51 Broken feedshift switch or job eject switch actuator. Check the status and remedy if necessary.2KJ/2KH Problem (14) A paper jam in the paper conveying section is indicated during copying (misfeed in registration/transfer section). Check the status and remedy if necessary. 43. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. registration switch Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch to be turned on and off. shift switch actuator.Check visually and replace switch. Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Eject switch. Feedshift switch. Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. Jam code 50 Check if the registration clutch malfunctions. (17) A paper jam in the eject section is indicated during copying (misfeed in job separator eject section). Broken eject switch or feed. (15) A paper jam in the fuser section is indicated during copying (misfeed in fuser section). 41. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the heat roller and its separation claws contact each other. cassette feed switch 1. Check visually and replace switch. 1-4-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Jam code 30 Causes/check procedures Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. 44 and 45 Check if the front fuser guide is deformed. Eject switch. job eject switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions. eject section is indiDefective switch. cassette feed switch 1 or duplex paper conveying switch actuator. Defective switch. Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Clean or replace if necessary. cated during copying (misfeed in eject section). Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Clean or replace if necessary. Corrective measures Check visually and replace. Registration switch. feedshift switch Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch to be turned on and off. duplex paper conveying switch Check visually and replace. Check visually and replace. Jam codes 40. Check (see page 1-4-32). Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Check visually and replace switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Check (see page 1-4-32). (16) Broken eject switch or regA paper jam in the istration switch actuator.

56. Jam code 70 Defective original set switch. Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch. (21) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (no original feed). duplex paper conveying switch Run maintenance item U030 and select the eject motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary. job eject switch Run maintenance item U030 and select the eject motor to be turned on and off. Check if the eject motor malfunctions. Duplex paper conveying switch. Check the status and remedy if necessary. 57 Causes/check procedures Broken feedshift switch. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Check if the duplex feed clutch malfunctions. Jam code 52. Check (see page 1-4-32). Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Feedshift switch. registration switch Run maintenance item U032 and select the duplex feed clutch to be turned on and off. (19) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (misfeed in duplex paper conveying section). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check (see page 1-4-32). Electrical problem with the eject motor. Defective switch. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Defective switch. Check the status and remedy if necessary.2KJ/2KH Problem (18) A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying (misfeed in feedshift section). Corrective measures Check visually and replace switch. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-13 . Check visually and replace switch. Jam code 60 Broken feedshift switch or duplex paper conveying switch actuator. Electrical problem with the duplex feed clutch. Feedshift switch. Defective switch. 54. Check if the DP paper feed pulley or DP separation pad is deformed. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor to be turned on and off. registration switch or job eject switch actuator. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original set switch on and off manually. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Electrical problem with the eject motor. Check (see page 1-4-32). Check (see page 1-4-32). Run maintenance item U032 and select the duplex feed clutch to be turned on and off. (20) A paper jam in the duplex section is indicated during copying (misfeed in duplex eject section). Check visually and replace switch. Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper conveying switch or registration switch actuator. 53. Check if the eject motor malfunctions. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the duplex feed clutch malfunctions. 55. Check visually and replace. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the original feed motor malfunctions. registration switch.

Jam code 81 (29) Defective paper conveying A paper jam in finswitch. If it does. replace the paper conveying switch. Change the paper. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Check if the original switchback motor malfunctions. Defective DP timing switch. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Jam code 72 (24) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (an original jam in the original conveying section 2). Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually. Jam code 71 (23) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (an original size error jam). Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually. Jam code 80 (28) Extremely curled paper. Jam code 73 (25) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (an original jam in the original conveying section 3). Defective DP timing switch. Check if the original conveying motor malfunctions. Check if the original conveying motor malfunctions. Defective DP timing switch. replace the paper conveying switch. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB. check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually. Check the status and remedy if necessary. replace the paper conveying switch. A paper jam in finDefective paper conveying isher is indicated durswitch. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. A paper jam in finDefective paper conveying isher is indicated durswitch. 1-4-14 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Problem (22) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (an original jam in the original conveying section 1). Check the status and remedy if necessary. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually. Check the status and remedy if necessary. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB. Check if the original conveying motor malfunctions. ing copying (finisher paper entry nonarrival jam). If it does. Check if the feedshift roller Jam code 83 or feedshift pulley is deformed. If it does. Corrective measures Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch on and off manually. check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check if the original conveying motor malfunctions. (27) Extremely curled paper. ing copying (jam between the finisher and machine). Jam code 74 (26) An original jams in DP is indicated during copying (an original jam in the original switchback section). check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. Run maintenance item U243 and select the original switchback motor to be turned on and off. Change the paper. isher is indicated during copying (finisher paper entry jam). Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying motor to be turned on and off. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Check visually and replace. Check the status and remedy if necessary. Jam code 75 Causes/check procedures Defective DP timing switch. With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB. Defective DP timing switch.

Check if the feedshift roller Jam code 84 or feedshift pulley is deformed. check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. Check visually and replace. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-15 . Check visually and replace. isher is indicated during copying (finisher eject jam). (30) Defective paper conveying A paper jam in finswitch. replace the paper conveying switch.2KJ/2KH Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB. If it does. Check if the eject roller or eject pulley is deformed.

copying is disabled and the problem displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number. After removing the problem.2KJ/2KH 1-4-2 Self-diagnosis (1) Self-diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. Check the details of the C call to take proper measures. If the error is detected continuously. a system error will be indicated. System error 0410 0420 0440 0500 0510 Contents Document processor communication problem First paper feeder communication problem Built-in finisher communication problem Second paper feeder communication problem Third paper feeder communication problem Table 1-4-1 Operation System error → service call System error → service call System error → service call System error → service call System error → service call Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service. If a system error occurs frequently. List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason. take actions to clear the cause of the trouble and perform maintenance item U163 to reset the service code. indicating the nature of the problem. the error can be cleared by turning the main power switch off and then on. After a system error is indicated. run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control. Code C8170 C8180 C8190 C8210 Contents Finisher front side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) Finisher rear side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher) Finisher stapler problem (optional built-in finisher) Measures against the service codes detecting fuser problems If one of the following service codes is detected. Code C6000 C6020 C6050 C6400 Fuser heater break Abnormally high fuser thermistor center temperaturee Abnormally low fuser thermistor center temperature Zero-cross signal error Contents 1-4-16 Service Manual Y111000-1 . After taking measures against the cause of trouble. however. partial operation control will be activated. a fault may have occurred. the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the main power switch off and back on. When a problem is detected. perform the operation shown in Table 1-4-1.

C0140 Backup memory data problem Data damage of EEPROM. Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. C0150 Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Backup memory data problem (Main PWB) Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values. Abnormal detection of fax control PWB incompatibility Fax software is not compatible with main software Backup memory (EEPROM) device problem (Main PWB) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Defective PWB. Device damage of EEPROM.2KJ/2KH (2) Self diagnostic codes Remarks Code C0030 Contents Fax control PWB system problem Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem. upgrade the version to the compatible software. Device damage of EEPROM. C0160 C0170 Data damage of EEPROM. C0100 C0110 Data damage of EEPROM. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. the total count and the scan count are abnormal both on the main PWB and the engine PWB. C0070 Fax software or main software is something of the other machine. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. C0130 Defective main PWB. Backup memory device problem (Engine EEPROM) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. C0180 Data damage of EEPROM. Contact the Service Administrative Division. (Main EEPROM) Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-17 . Contact the Service Administrative Division. Defective engine PWB. Machine number mismatch Machine number of main PWB and engine PWB does not match. Backup memory device problem (Main EEPROM) Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed. Copy counts problem When the power is turned on. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Data damage of EEPROM. Defective main PWB. Contact the Service Administrative Division. Check the version of the fax software and the main software. Causes Defective fax control PWB. Backup memory data problem (Engine EEPROM) Reading data from EEPROM is abnormal. Contact the Service Administrative Division.

C0440 Built-in finisher communication problem Communication fails five times successively. Second paper feeder installed incorrectly. Replace the engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation. Reinsert the connector. C0510 Third paper feeder communication problem Communication fails five times successively. Document processor communication problem Communication fails five times successively. Check the connection of connector YC4 on the engine PWB and the connector of the built-in finisher. Reinsert the connector. Document processor installed incorrectly. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Check the installation state of the document processor and adjust it if it is not properly installed. If none. C0500 Second paper feeder communication problem Communication fails five times successively. Replace the engine PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. 1-4-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Replace the engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective PWB. C0280 Communication problem between the fax control PWB and main PWB Communication between the fax control PWB and the main PWB of the machine cannot be performed normally. C0250 Scanner network board communication problem The scanner network board does not respond. Defective PWB. Defective PWB. Replace the engine PWB or cassette main PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. remedy or replace the cable. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Check the installation state of the first paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Defective PWB. Defective main PWB. If none. Defective PWB. Check the installation state of the third paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Reinsert the connector. remedy or replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Printer PWB communication problem The printer PWB does not respond 120 s after the power is turned on. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective PWB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Third paper feeder installed incorrectly. If none. remedy or replace the cable. the machine does not detect the low level of SBSY and the high level of SDIR for 10 s. Replace the main PWB or scanner network board and check for correct operation. Defective PWB. C0410 C0420 First paper feeder communication problem Communication fails five times successively. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation. remedy or replace the cable. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C0210 Contents Communication problem between the main and engine When the power is turned on. Check the installation state of the second paper feeder and adjust it if it is not properly installed. Replace the engine PWB or DP driver PWB and check for correct operation. Poor contact in the connector terminals. First paper feeder installed incorrectly. C0240 Poor contact in the connector terminals. If none.

Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. rotated. Fax control PWB program archive problem (optional fax) When power is turned on. Check the version of the fax software and the main software. Fax control PWB software switch checksum error A checksum error occurred with the software switch value of the fax control PWB. Defective DIMM. C0830 Defective fax control PWB. C0890 Defective fax control PWB. C0800 C0820 Defective main PWB. Reinsert the connector. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Causes Defective main PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. decompressed. relocated or blanked-out image data does not complete within the specified period of time. the compressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem High-capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the main PWB of the machine was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times. Install the fax software. the compressed CG font in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not successfully decompressed. DIMM installed incorrectly. C0630 DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed. upgrade the version to the compatible software. Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB and check for correct operation. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-19 . remedy or replace the cable. Fax control PWB flash program area checksum error A checksum error occurred with the program of the fax control PWB. If none. Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation. Defective fax control PWB. Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly. C0900 Fax software version or main software is earlier. C0870 C0880 Defective fax control PWB. C0860 Defective fax software. Image processing problem JAM05 is detected twice. Fax control PWB CG ROM checksum error A checksum error occurred with the CG ROM data of the fax control PWB.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C0610 Contents Bitmap (DIMM) problem There is a problem with the data or address bus of the bitmap DRAM. Fax control PWB CG FONT archive problem (optional fax) When power is turned on. Fax software incompatibility detection problem Version of fax software is not compatible with that of main software. Defective main PWB. Defective fax control PWB.

grease the bushings and gears. Defective engine PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. grease the bushings and gears. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drum motor. Replace the drive motor. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. C2200 Drum motor problem A stable state does not continue for 1 s from 1 s after the drum motor is activated. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check for broken gears and replace if any. exposure lamp. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective drive motor. or scanner wire is defective. Defective engine PWB. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the drum motor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective drive transmission system. Defective drum motor. Replace the scanner motor. Check the connection of connector YC5 on the engine PWB and the connector on the home position switch. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. Replace the home position switch. If not. The mirror frame. Check if the mirror flames and exposure lamp are on the rail. Repair or replace if necessary. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Causes Defective fax control PWB. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Defective home position switch. Check the connection of connector YC6 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drive motor. Defective engine PWB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. C3100 Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table. Drive motor problem A stable state does not continue for 1 s from 1 s after the drive motor is activated. If not. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation. Defective scanner motor. C2000 Poor contact in the connector terminals. Defective drive transmission system. and the continuity across the connector terminals. And check the scanner wire winds correctly. 1-4-20 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C0920 Contents Fax file system error The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB.

Replace the exposure lamp. Replace the exposure lamp. Defective PWB. Defective exposure lamp. Defective PWB. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the connection of connector YC16 on the engine PWB and the connector on the inverter PWB. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Defective exposure lamp. Replace the laser scanner unit. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-21 . Repair or replace if necessary. Defective laser scanner unit. Defective engine PWB. C4200 BD steady-state problem ASIC detects a BD error for 600 ms after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized. Defective polygon motor. Adjust the position of the contact glass (shading plate). Replace the laser scanner unit. If the problem still occurs. C4000 Polygon motor synchronization problem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed within 20 s of the START signal turning on. Repair or replace if necessary. Repair or replace if necessary. Defective engine PWB. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC3 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit. Check the connection of connector YC5 on the main PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB. replace the home position switch. Replace the laser scanner unit. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Check the connection of connector YC3 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit. Defective polygon motor. and the continuity across the connector terminals. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Incorrect shading position. Check the connection of connector YC3 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit. correct input is not obtained at CCD. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the main PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation. Replace the engine PWB or inverter PWB and check for correct operation. Defective engine PWB. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Repair or replace if necessary. and the continuity across the connector terminals. C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem Stable OFF is detected for 5 s continuously after polygon motor stability.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C3200 Contents Exposure lamp problem Non-lighting of the exposure lamp is detected at the beginning of copying. C3300 AGC problem After AGC.

remedy or replace the cable. C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor remains below 90°C/ 194°F for 1 s. If it is 0 Ω. Check for continuity. Fuser thermostat triggered. Fuser heater installed incorrectly. Poor contact in the fuser thermistor connector terminals. Check for continuity. Check and reinstall if necessary. Fuser thermostat triggered. Causes Poor contact in the fuser thermistor connector terminals. Check if the zero-crossing signal is output from YC2-2 on the power source PWB. replace the fuser heater. remedy or replace the cable. Defective engine PWB. Check for continuity. If not. Check and reinstall if necessary. Broken fuser heater wire. replace the fuser heater. power source PWB. Temperature rise of 1°C/1. Check and reinstall if necessary. C6400 Zero-cross signal error Interrupt of the zero-cross signal does not occur more than 1 s. Measure the resistance. replace the thermistor. remedy or replace the cable. Broken fuser thermistor wire. Check and reinstall if necessary. Replace the engine PWB if C6400 is detected while YC2-2 on the power source PWB outputs the zero-crossing signal. Defective power source PWB. replace the fuser thermostat. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. If none. Reinsert the connector.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C6000 Contents Fuser heater break The temperature does not reach 70 °C/ 158°F in 15 s before secondary stabilization. Broken fuser heater wire. If none. Reinsert the connector. If it is ∞ Ω. Poor contact in the connector terminals.8°F does not occur in 5 s before secondary stabilization (except during printing). replace the fuser thermostat. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the power source PWB. If none. Check for continuity. C6020 Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor is detected 230°C/ 446°F or more for 40 ms. 1-4-22 Service Manual Y111000-1 .Replace the power source PWB and check trol circuit on the for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none. Fuser thermistor installed incorrectly. If none. Broken heater con. Shorted thermistor. If none. Fuser heater installed incorrectly. Measure the resistance. replace the fixing thermistor. Fuser thermistor installed incorrectly. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.

remedy or replace the cable. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-23 . the sensor did not turn on in 3 s. Replace the cassette PWB and check for correct operation. contact. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace front side registration motor. Reinsert the connector. remedy or replace the cable. Defective rear side registration motor. remedy or replace the cable.5 V or less. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Replace the cassette PWB and check for correct operation. The front side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Defective rear side registration home position sensor. Replace the front side registration home position sensor. C8180 Built-in finisher rear side registration motor problem When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization. Also check for continuity within the connector cable.Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. The front side reg. Causes Poor contact in the connector terminals. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. remedy or replace the cable. nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. If none. Also check for contiistration motor con. Defective front side registration motor.5 V or more. C7810 Short-circuited external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 4. C8170 Built-in finisher front side registration motor problem When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned on during initialization. the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable. Defective front side registration home position sensor.nuity within the connector cable. contact. If none. If none. If none. Reinsert the connector. the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses. The rear side registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact. Reinsert the connector. the sensor did not turn on in 3 s. When the rear-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. Defective humidity sensor. Poor contact in the connector terminals. Replace the rear side registration home position sensor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective humidity sensor. Reinsert the connector. When the front-side registration homeposition sensor is turned off during initialization.nuity within the connector cable. Also check for contiThe rear side registration motor con. If none. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace rear side registration motor. If none.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C7800 Contents Broken external thermistor wire The thermistor output value is 0.

remedy or replace the cable. If none. Reinsert the connector. The stapler is blocked with a staple. The stapler connector makes poor contact. Causes The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact. If none. If none. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective finisher control PWB. Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. C8210 Built-in finisher stapler problem The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise (forward) rotation. 1-4-24 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Remove the stapler cartridge. Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation. During initialization. Replace the front stapler and check for correct operation. and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the stapler. Defective trailing edge registration home position sensor. Defective trailing edge registration motor. the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non-detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise (reverse) rotation. Reinsert the connector. When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned off during initialization. Replace trailing edge registration motor. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. remedy or replace the cable. remedy or replace the cable. The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact.2KJ/2KH Remarks Code C8190 Contents Built-in finisher trailing edge registration motor problem When the trailing edge registration home-position sensor is turned on during initialization. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. the sensor did not turn on in 3 s. Defective finisher control PWB. The stapler is broken. the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses.

See page 1-4-28. See page 1-4-28. See page 1-4-30. (13)Paper creases. (5)A white line appears longitudinally. See page 1-4-29. See page 1-4-26.2KJ/2KH 1-4-3 Image formation problems (2)No image appears (entirely black). See page 1-4-28. (4)Background is visible. (18)Image center does not align with the original center. (16)Fusing is poor. (10)Image is blurred. See page 1-4-30. (6)A black line appears longitudinally. (9)Black dots appear on the image. (7)A black line appears laterally. (1)No image appears (entirely white). (11)The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. See page 1-4-29. (3)Image is too light. See page 1-4-26. (15)Image is partly missing. (12)The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-25 . See page 1-4-27. See page 1-4-29. (17)Image is out of focus. See page 1-4-29. See page 1-4-28. (14)Offset occurs. See page 1-4-31. See page 1-4-27. See page 1-4-30. See page 1-4-30. See page 1-4-27. (8)One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. replace the high voltage PWB.Reinsert the connector. Defective engine PWB. Check if main charging takes place when CN1-7 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If none. remedy or replace the cable. If not. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-35). Check if YC8-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. 1-4-26 Service Manual Y111000-1 . If not. replace the high voltage PWB. If not. No LSU laser is output. If not. Poor contact in the expo. If none. remedy or replace the cable. remedy or replace the cable. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. replace the main PWB. remedy or replace the cable. Defective inverter PWB. If not. Check if developing bias is output when CN1-9 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. replace the engine PWB. (2) No image appears (entirely black). If none. Check if YC6-5 on the main PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run.2KJ/2KH (1) No image appears (entirely white). Check if YC8-7 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run. Reinsert the connector. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). replace the engine PWB.connector cable. If not. replace the inverter PWB. Causes The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Defective engine PWB. If none. Defective main PWB. Defective engine PWB. Exposure lamp fails to light. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Defective engine PWB. If not. Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1-3 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Defective high voltage PWB. Defective high voltage PWB. replace the engine PWB. No developing bias output. If not. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. replace the high voltage PWB. Defective laser scanner unit. Defective high voltage PWB. Causes Broken main charger wire. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the sure lamp connector ter. Leaking main charger housing. Check if YC8-9 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. Copy example No main charging. minals. replace the engine PWB. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Clean the main charger wire and grid. Copy example No transfer charging. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Check if YC16-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U061 is run. If not.

Copy example Causes The developing bias voltage is not properly. Clean the wire or. Reinsert the connector. replace the engine PWB. Check if YC8-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If none. replace the container. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Copy example Causes Dirty main charger wire. (4) Background is visible. remedy or replace the cable. Clean the shading plate. Dirty shading plate. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Defective high voltage PWB.2KJ/2KH (3) Image is too light. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. Check procedures/corrective measures If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment. Clean the wire or. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). if it is extremely dirty. (5) A white line appears longitudinally. Defective transfer charging output. Defective engine PWB. Dirty main charger grid. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the high voltage PWB and check for correct operation. if it is extremely dirty. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the grid or. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the wire or. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. Copy example Causes Insufficient toner. Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. replace the high voltage PWB. if it is extremely dirty. Dirty main charger wire. if it is extremely dirty. Foreign matter in the developing unit. If not. If not. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-27 . Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter (see page 1-5-44).

Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. Copy example Causes Dirty contact glass. Dirty developing section. Leaking main charger housing. Dirty scanner mirror. Dirty main charger wire. 1-4-28 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Defective exposure lamp. Copy example Causes Dirty contact glass. Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the contact glass. Copy example Causes Dirty contact glass. Clean the drum or. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. (7) A black line appears laterally. replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). If not. if it is extremely dirty. replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the contact glass. Dirty or flawed drum. if it is flawed. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the main charger wire and grid. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Clean the heat roller separation claws. Dirty or flawed drum.2KJ/2KH (6) A black line appears longitudinally. if it is flawed. Clean the scanner mirror. Copy example Causes Dirty main charger wire. if it is extremely dirty. (8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. Leaking separation electrode. (9) Black dots appear on the image. Clean the drum or. Clean the separation electrode. Clean the drum or. replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Clean the wire or. Clean the drum separation claws. replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the wire or. replace the exposure lamp (see page 1-5-24). Dirty the heat roller separation claws. Dirty drum separation claws. Check procedures/corrective measures Clean the contact glass. if it is flawed.

Paper damp. Copy example Causes Paper feed clutch. (11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration (see page 1-3-12). (12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. Check procedures/corrective measures Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-49). Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Check the paper storage conditions. Defective separation. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the installation position and operation of each clutch or solenoid. Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-19). If any. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws. Deformed press roller. Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration. Check the paper storage conditions. Replace the pressure springs. If any of them operates incorrectly. grease them. Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration. Paper conveying section drive problem. Defective pressure springs. Check the gears and belts and. Copy example Causes Scanner moves erratically. remove it. MP solenoid or registration clutch installed or operating incorrectly.2KJ/2KH (10) Image is blurred. Copy example Paper curled. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-29 . replace it. if necessary. (13) Paper creases.

2KJ/2KH (14) Offset occurs. Copy example Causes Defective cleaning blade. Defective fuser unit. Wrong types of paper. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Check the heat roller and press roller. Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper.

(15) Image is partly missing. Copy example Paper damp. Paper creased. Dirty or flawed drum. Dirty transfer roller. Causes Check procedures/corrective measures Check the paper storage conditions. Change the paper. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Clean the transfer roller.

(16) Fusing is poor. Copy example Causes Wrong types of paper. Defective pressure springs. Flawed press roller. Flawed fuser heater. Check procedures/corrective measures Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper. Replace the pressure springs. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-49). Replace the fuser heaters (see page 1-5-51).

(17) Image is out of focus. Copy example Causes Defective image scanning unit. Drum condensation. Check procedures/corrective measures Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-5-33). Clean the drum.

1-4-30

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH (18) Image center does not align with the original center. Copy example Causes Misadjusted image center line. Misadjusted scanner center line. Original is not placed correctly. Check procedures/corrective measures Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-3-13). Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-3-20). Place the original correctly.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-4-31

2KJ/2KH

1-4-4

Electric problems

Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms. Problem (1) The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on. Causes 1. The power cord is not plugged in properly. 2. No electricity at the power outlet. 3. Broken power cord. 4. Defective main power switch. 5. Defective power source PWB. (2) The eject motor does not operate. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Defective drive transmission system. 3. Defective eject motor. 4. Defective engine PWB. (3) The cassette drive motor does not operate. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Defective drive transmission system. 3. Defective cassette drive motor. 4. Defective cassette main PWB. (4) The scanner motor or cooling fan motor 1, 2 does not operate. (5) The paper feed clutch, registration clutch or duplex feed clutch does not operate. 1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Broken motor coil. 1. Broken clutch coil. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 3. Defective cassette PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet. Measure the input voltage. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the main power switch. With AC present, check for 24 V DC at YC1-2, YC1-3 and YC1-4 on the power source PWB. If none, replace the power source PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor operates. If not, replace the eject motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor operates. If not, replace the engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the cassette drive motor operates. If not, replace the cassette drive motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the cassette drive motor operates. If not, replace the cassette main PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the cassette PWB goes low. If not, replace the cassette PWB. Paper feed clutch: YC7-2 on the cassette PWB Registration clutch: YC6-2 on the cassette PWB Duplex feed clutch: YC5-6 on the cassette PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB. Paper feed clutch: YC7-17 on the engine PWB Registration clutch: YC7-18 on the engine PWB Duplex feed clutch: YC7-12 on the engine PWB

4. Defective engine PWB.

1-4-32

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH Problem (6) The MP solenoid does not operate. Causes 1. Broken solenoid coil. 2. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 3. Defective cassette PWB. Check procedures/corrective measures Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the cassette PWB goes low. If not, replace the cassette PWB. MP solenoid: YC8-2 on the cassette PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB. MP solenoid: YC7-16 on the engine PWB Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp. If YC3-B6 and YC3-B7 on the engine PWB is always low, replace the engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

4. Defective engine PWB.

(7) The cleaning lampdoes not turn on.

1. Poor contact in the connector terminals. 2. Defective cleaning lamp. 3. Defective engine PWB.

(8) The exposure lamp does not turn on or off.

1. Poor contact in the connector terminals.

2. Defective exposure lamp. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC2-1 and YC2-4 on the inverter PCB go low. If not, replace the exposure lamp. 3. Defective inverter PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1-3 on the inverter PWB go low. If not, replace the inverter PWB. If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1-3 on the inverter PWB high, replace the inverter PWB. 4. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC16-4 on the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB. If YC16-4 on the engine PWB is always low, replace the engine PWB.

(9) Main charging is not performed.

1. Broken main charger wire. 2. Leaking main charger housing. 3. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. 4. Defective high voltage PWB. 5. Defective engine PWB.

Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-43). Clean the main charger wire and grid. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if main charging takes place when CN1-7 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. Check if YC8-7 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if developing bias is output when CN1-9 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. Check if YC8-9 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.

(10) No developing bias is output.

1. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. 2. Defective high voltage PWB. 3. Defective engine PWB.

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-4-33

2KJ/2KH Problem (11) Transfer charging is not performed. Causes 1. The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact. 2. Defective high voltage PWB. 3. Defective engine PWB. (12) The original size is not detected correctly. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable. Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-4 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB. Check if YC8-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.

1. Original is not placed cor- Check the original and correct if necessary. rectly. 2. Poor contact in the original detection switch or original size detection sensor connector terminals. 3. Defective original detection switch. 4. Defective original size detection sensor. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

If the level of YC5-B8 on the engine PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off, replace the original detection switch. Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it. Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

(13) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cassette or MP tray.

1. Poor contact in the connector terminals of paper switch or MP paper switch. 2. Defective paper switch or MP paper switch.

If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch. Paper switch: YC2-2 on the cassette PWB MP paper switch: YC5-12 on the cassette PWB Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.

(14) The size of paper on the cassette or MP tray is not displayed correctly.

1. Poor contact in the connector terminals of paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch. 2. Defective paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch.

If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch. Paper size length switch: YC9-B3, B4, B6 on the engine PWB MP paper size width switch: YC5-2 on the cassette PWB Check visually and remove it, if any.

(15) 1. A piece of paper torn A paper jam in the from copy paper is paper feed, paper caught around registraconveying, eject or tion switch, eject switch duplex section is indior duplex paper conveycated when the main ing switch. power switch is 2. Defective switch. turned on.

Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light. Registration switch, eject switch, duplex paper conveying switch

1-4-34

Service Manual

Y111000-1

remedy or replace the cable. 2. replace it. If there is no continuity when the switch is on. If none. Poor contact in the connector terminals of front cover safety switch or left cover safety switch. Defective front cover safety switch or left cover safety switch. Wiring is broken. Check for continuity. Check procedures/corrective measures Reinsert the connector. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-35 . 1. Check for continuity across each switch. (17) Others. If none. Causes 1.2KJ/2KH Problem (16) The message requesting cover to be closed is displayed when the front cover or left cover is closed. Also check for continuity within the connector cable. shorted or makes poor contact. repair.

See page 1-4-32. Electrical problem with the following clutches and solenoid: paper feed clutch.2KJ/2KH 1-4-5 Mechanical problems Problem Causes/check procedures Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder: forwarding pulley. 1-4-36 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Electrical problem with the registration clutch. Check if the separation pulley is worn. Paper is extremely curled. (7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. forwarding pulley. See page 1-4-32. page 1-5-18). Repair if any springs are off the separation claws. (1) No primary paper feed. Clean the developing unit. Check if the scanner wire is loose. Change the paper. (6) Paper jams. separation pulley. Change the paper. Check if the MP separation pad is worn. Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed. (2) No secondary paper feed. Clean or replace the press roller. Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct. Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place. Check if the upper/lower forwarding pulleys. The scanner motor malfunctions. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn (see page 1-5-3). Check visually and replace any deformed guide. paper feed pulley. Corrective measures Clean with isopropyl alcohol. Check if the surfaces of the right and left registration rollers are dirty with paper powder. Replace the MP separation pad if it is worn (see page 1-5-18). Deformed width guide in a cassette. paper feed pulley or separation pulley is deformed.Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see aration pad is deformed. (3) Skewed paper feed. Clean with isopropyl alcohol. See page 1-4-32. Check visually and remedy if necessary. Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-526). Check visually and remedy if necessary. Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary. Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see page 1-5-3). Deformed guides along the paper conveying path. Check if the MP paper feed pulley or MP sep. (5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad. Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct. Repair or replace. (4) The scanner does not travel. registration roller. Paper is extremely curled. Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty. registration clutch and MP solenoid. Check visually and replace any deformed guides. Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct.

smoothly.2KJ/2KH Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures Grease the bearings and gears. registration clutch and MP solenoid. Correct. rollers and gears operate Abnormal noise is heard. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-4-37 . (8) Check if the pulleys. Check if the following clutches and solenoid are installed correctly: paper feed clutch.

1-4-38 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH This page is intentionally left blank.

2KJ/2KH 1-5 Assembly and Disassembly 1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly (1) Precautions Before starting disassembly. do not touch parts with bare hands. use the original screws. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. never expose the drum surface to strong direct light. Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge. Avoid direct light and high humidity. The PWBs are susceptible to static charge. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-1 . To reassemble the parts. refer to the PARTS LIST. (2) Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum. Turning off the main power switch before pressing the power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk. Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not higher than 90% RH. Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat. press the Power key on the operation panel to off. dark place. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil. clean it. Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum. When removing the hook of the connector. Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. (3) Toner Store the toner container in a cool. When fax kit is installed. be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly. as the machine may be seriously damaged. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known. be sure to release the hook. Take care not to get the cables caught. When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards). When removing the drum unit. Never substitute electric wires.

Through each window of the validation viewer.2KJ/2KH (4) How to tell a genuine Olivetti toner container As a means of brand protection. Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container. See through the left window ( marking) See through the right window ( marking) Validation viewer Validation viewer Brand protection seal Brand protection seal A black-colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window Figure 1-5-1 The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse. the Olivetti toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual validation. Incision Cut Figure 1-5-2 1-5-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 . the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows: A black-colored band when seen through the left side window A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Olivetti branded toner container. it is a counnterfeit terfeit. otherwise. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this.

Procedure 1. Cassette Figure 1-5-3 3. Remove the screw and remove the front left lower cover.2KJ/2KH 1-5-2 Paper feed section (1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the separation pulley. Screw Front left lower cover Figure 1-5-4 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-3 . Open the front cover and left cover. Pull out the cassette. 2.

Release two hooks and remove the separation pulley unit from the lower paper feed unit. Separation pulley unit Hook Hook Separation pulley unit Lower paper feed unit Separation pulley unit Figure 1-5-6 1-5-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Screw Lower paper feed unit Figure 1-5-5 5.2KJ/2KH 4. Remove the screw and remove the lower paper feed unit.

Remove the separation pulley shaft from the separation pulley unit. 8.2KJ/2KH 6. Separation pulley shaft Separation pulley Figure 1-5-7 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-5 . Remove the separation pulley from the separation pulley shaft. 7. Replace the separation pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Remove the paper feed clutch.2KJ/2KH (2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. Procedure 1. 5. stop ring and bush. Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Rear cover Figure 1-5-8 4. Remove the connector of the paper feed clutch. 3. 2. Remove five screws and remove the rear cover. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page 1-5-3). Bush Stop ring Paper feed clutch Figure 1-5-9 1-5-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-41).

2KJ/2KH 6. Remove the screw and remove the registration guide. Upper paper feed unit Screw Figure 1-5-11 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-7 . Registration guide Screw Figure 1-5-10 7. Remove the screw and remove the upper paper feed unit.

Remove the springs. Replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley and refit all the removed parts.2KJ/2KH 8. Shaft holder Spring Spring Bush Stop ring Upper paper feed unit Figure 1-5-12 9. Remove the collar and the paper feed pulley from the upper paper feed shaft. Remove the paper feed pulley shaft from the upper paper feed unit. stop ring and bush and then remove the shaft holder from the upper paper feed unit. Paper feed pulley Collar Paper feed pulley shaft Forwarding pulley Figure 1-5-13 1-5-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 12. 10. 11. Remove the forwarding pulley from the upper paper feed unit.

Remove five screws and remove the main body from paper feeder.2KJ/2KH (3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (22 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the feed roller. Remove three cover labels. 2. 3. Remove the front left lower cover (see page 1-5-3). Procedure 1. Screw Screw Cover label Screw Screw Screw Cover label Cover label Paper feeder Figure 1-5-14 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-9 .

5. Spring pin Gear Bush Feed roller Bush Figure 1-5-16 1-5-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 8. Open the cassette left cover. Replace the feed roller and refit all the removed parts. Slide the feed roller toward the rear side and remove the roller from the paper feeder. 6. Remove the gear.2KJ/2KH 4. spring pin and two bushes from the feed roller. Lift the rear of the feed roller upward. Remove the stop ring from rear side of the feed roller and slide the bush toward the inside. Stop ring Bush Feed roller Figure 1-5-15 7.

3. Screw Lower paper feed unit Figure 1-5-17 4. Pull out the cassette. Open the front cover and left cover. Separation pulley unit Hook Hook Separation pulley unit Lower paper feed unit Separation pulley unit Figure 1-5-18 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-11 .2KJ/2KH (4) Detaching and refitting the cassette separation pulley (22 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the cassette separation pulley. 2. Release two hooks and remove the separation pulley unit from the lower paper feed unit. Remove the screw and remove the lower paper feed unit. Procedure 1.

Separation pulley shaft Cassette separation pulley Figure 1-5-19 1-5-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 6. 7. Remove the separation pulley shaft from the separation pulley unit.2KJ/2KH 5. Remove the cassette separation pulley from the separation pulley shaft. Replace the cassette separation pulley and refit all the removed parts.

Remove the screw and the pin and then remove the cassette rear cover. 2. Remove the stop ring and remove the cassette paper feed clutch. 5. Bush Stop ring Stop ring Cassette paper feed clutch Figure 1-5-21 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-13 . 3. Cassette rear cover Screw Pin Figure 1-5-20 4.2KJ/2KH (5) Detaching and refitting the cassette forwarding pulley and cassette paper feed pulley (22 ppm model only) Follow the procedure below to replace the cassette forwarding pulley and cassette paper feed pulley. 6. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page 1-5-11). Remove the stop ring and the bush. Remove the connector of the cassette paper feed clutch. Procedure 1. Remove the feed roller (see page 1-5-9).

Remove the springs. Upper paper feed unit Screw Figure 1-5-22 8.2KJ/2KH 7. Remove the screw and remove the upper paper feed unit. Shaft holder Spring Spring Bush Stop ring Upper paper feed unit Figure 1-5-23 1-5-14 Service Manual Y111000-1 . stop ring and bush and then remove the shaft holder from the upper paper feed unit.

Remove the collar and the cassette paper feed pulley from the upper paper feed shaft. 10. Remove the paper feed pulley shaft from the upper paper feed unit. Paper feed pulley shaft Cassette paper feed pulley Collar Cassette forwarding pulley Figure 1-5-24 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-15 .2KJ/2KH 9. 12. 11. Replace the cassette forwarding pulley and cassette paper feed pulley and refit all the removed parts. Remove the cassette forwarding pulley from the upper paper feed unit.

3. Procedure 1. Remove the stop ring and stopper from the front side of the left cover. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-41).2KJ/2KH (6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit Follow the procedure below to maintenance of the paper feed section. 2. Remove the stop ring and strap from the rear side of the left cover. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page 1-5-11). Stop ring Strap Stop ring Stopper Figure 1-5-25 1-5-16 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

5. Paper conveying unit Left cover Figure 1-5-26 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-17 . Remove the left cover from machine.2KJ/2KH 4. Remove the paper conveying unit from the machine.

Remove the screw and remove the front left lower cover (see page 1-5-3). 6. Bush Stop ring Figure 1-5-27 5. Pull out the cassette. Open the front cover and remove the waste toner box. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-5-16). 4. Remove the rear cover (see page 1-5-6). MP drive unit Screw Screws Figure 1-5-28 1-5-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 2. 3. Remove three screws and remove the MP drive unit. Procedure 1. Remove the stop ring and bush from the front side of the machine.2KJ/2KH (7) Detaching and refitting the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad Follow the procedure below to replace the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad.

Remove the stop ring. Bush Gear Stop ring Figure 1-5-29 8.2KJ/2KH 7. MP paper feed pulley unit Figure 1-5-30 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-19 . gear and bush. Temporarily push the MP paper feed pulley unit into the rear side to unlock the front side and then remove it from the machine.

MP paper feed pulley shaft Spring pin MP paper feed pulley MP paper guide Stop ring Figure 1-5-31 10. Remove the stop ring. MP paper guide. spring pin and the MP paper feed pulley.2KJ/2KH 9. Push the inserted parts of the MP separation pad and remove the pad from the machine. 11. MP separation pad MP separation pad Figure 1-5-32 1-5-20 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Replace the MP paper feed pulley and MP separation pad and refit all the removed parts.

2KJ/2KH (8) Detaching and refitting the left registration roller Follow the procedure below to replace the left registration roller. gear and two bushes. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-5-16). Left registration roller unit Paper conveying unit Stopper Figure 1-5-33 3. Remove two stoppers. Release the stoppers at the front and rear side. Procedure 1. 4. Replace the left registration roller and refit all the removed parts. 2. Gear Stopper Bush Left registration roller Bush Stopper Figure 1-5-34 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-21 . and then remove the left registration roller from the paper conveying unit.

Remove the rear cover (see page 1-5-6). Stop ring Right registration roller Figure 1-5-36 1-5-22 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 3. Remove the connector and remove the registration clutch. Remove the right registration roller from the machine. Registration clutch Figure 1-5-35 4. Remove the stop ring. 5. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). Procedure 1. 2.2KJ/2KH (9) Detaching and refitting the right registration roller Follow the procedure below to replace the right registration roller.

2KJ/2KH 6. Replace the right registration roller and refit all the removed parts. 7. Remove two bushes and gear. Bush Gear Right registration roller Bush Figure 1-5-37 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-23 .

Screw Right upper cover Screw Contact glass Figure 1-5-38 3. 5. Remove two screws and remove the rear upper cover. Procedure 1. 4. 2. Remove the original cover or the document processor. Remove two screws and remove the right upper cover.2KJ/2KH 1-5-3 Optical section (1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Follow the procedure below to replace the exposure lamp. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove the front left cover (see ). Remove the contact glass. 6. Screw Rear upper cover Screw Front scanner cover Front scanner cover Hook Hook Hook Hook Both Hook Figure 1-5-39 1-5-24 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Release five hooks and both and then remove the front scanner cover.

2KJ/2KH 7. do not touch the exposure lamp and the inverter PWB. When moving the mirror 1 frame. Remove the connector of the exposure lamp from inverter PWB and remove the lamp wire from ribs. Film Film Mirror 1 frame Figure 1-5-40 9. Remove two screws and remove the exposure lamp. 11. Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position. Screw Exposure lamp Screw Figure 1-5-42 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-25 . Connector Lamp wire Inverter PWB Figure 1-5-41 10. Remove two films from the scanner unit. 8. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the removed parts.

Release five hooks and two bothes and then remove the left upper cover. 3. Left middle cover Hook Hook Hook Hook Hook Hook Left middle cover Both Figure 1-5-43 4. 2. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-524).2KJ/2KH (2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced. Release six hooks and both and then remove the left middle cover. Open the left cover. Left upper cover Left upper cover Hook Both Both Hook Hook Hook Hook Figure 1-5-44 1-5-26 Service Manual Y111000-1 . (2-1) Detaching the scanner wires Procedure 1.

Remove the inverter wire from the inverter PWB. Slit glass Screw Slit retainer Figure 1-5-45 6. Remove two wire guides. Inverter wire Inverter PWB Wire guide Wire guide Figure 1-5-46 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-27 . Remove the screw and remove the slit retainer and slit glass.2KJ/2KH 5. 7.

2KJ/2KH 8. Remove the round terminals from the scanner wire springs. Scanner wire spring Scanner wire spring Round terminal Round terminal Figure 1-5-48 1-5-28 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Mirror 1 frame Screw Screw Front wire retainer Rear wire retainer Figure 1-5-47 9. 10. Remove the mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit. Remove the scanner wires. Remove each screw and remove front and rear wire holder plates.

Remove the rear cover. gray Machine rear: (P/N: AVGR00574S). Remove the stop ring and bush. Machine front: (P/N: AVGR00575W). be sure to use those specified below. Right middle cover Screw Screw Right middle cover Hook Both Both Hook Figure 1-5-49 2. Screw Bush Stop ring Scanner wire drum gear Figure 1-5-50 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-29 . 3. black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools (P/N AVGR03672L) Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 417928N) Procedure 1. Remove the screw and remove the scanner wire drum gear from the rear side of the machine.2KJ/2KH (2-2) Fitting the scanner wires NOTE When fitting the wires.

Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner wires into the hole in the respective scanner wire drum and wind the scanner wire three turns inward and four turns outward. 7. Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the scanner unit. Remove the stop ring and bush from the front of the machine. Scanner wire drum shaft Bush Stop ring Figure 1-5-51 6.2KJ/2KH 4. With the locating ball as the reference point. Scanner wire stopper Scanner wire stopper Three turns inward Three turns inward Scanner wire drum Four turns outward Locating ball Four turns outward Figure 1-5-52 1-5-30 Service Manual Y111000-1 . 5. Secure the scanner wires using the scanner wire stoppers. wind the shorter end of each of the wires outward.

............................................. 9........................................................................... .. Insert the two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to fix the mirror 2 frame in position... Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit........................... Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame............................................ .................................. (5) 15................... .... (2) 12.. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame.....................2KJ/2KH 8........... Frame securing tool Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Figure 1-5-53 10..................................... Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit........ ................................. (1) 11.......... winding from below to above.............................................. (6) Figure 1-5-54 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-31 ..................... winding from below to above................................ Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the scanner unit................ winding from above to below....................... Hook the round terminals onto the scanner wire springs......... Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit........... (4) 14.............. (3) 13.............

Refit all the removed parts. 21. 22. Remove two scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools. 18. Frame securing tool Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Mirror 1 frame Figure 1-5-55 1-5-32 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum. 20. 17.2KJ/2KH 16. Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail and move it toward the left side of the machine. Insert the frame securing tools into the positioning holes (leftmost holes) at the front and rear of the scanner unit and screw the mirror 1 frame while securing both the mirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position. 19. move aside the wires to inside. Remove two frame securing tools.

Remove four screws and remove the ISU cover. 2.2KJ/2KH (3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU. CCD PWB CCD wire Figure 1-5-57 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-33 . Procedure 1. Screws ISU cover Screws Figure 1-5-56 3. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-524). Remove the CCD wire from the CCD PWB.

Remove each screw and remove two plates.2KJ/2KH 4. 7. 5. Refit all the removed parts. 6. Remove three screws and remove the ISU Replace the ISU. Screw Screw Plate Screws Plate ISU Figure 1-5-58 1-5-34 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

3. Remove the rear cover (see page 1-5-6). Remove the right middle cover (see page 15-29). rear upper cover and front scanner cover (see page 1-5-24). Procedure 1. Remove the original cover or the document processor. Remove the left middle cover. left upper cover and slit glass (see page 1-5-26). 2. Remove the right upper cover. Screw Front right cover Hook Front right cover Hook Hook Figure 1-5-59 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-35 .2KJ/2KH (4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Follow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit. contact glass. Remove the front left cover (see page 1-547). Remove the screw and release three hooks and then remove the front right cover.

Screw Shield cover Screw Figure 1-5-61 1-5-36 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH 4. Remove two screws and release six hooks and two both. and then remove the right middle cover. Right lower cover Screw Screw Hook Hook Both Both Hook Right lower cover Hook Hook Hook Figure 1-5-60 5. Remove two screws and remove the shield cover.

Remove four pins and remove the scanner unit. Remove YC5. 7. YC15 and YC16 connectors of the engine PWB.2KJ/2KH 6. YC5 YC15 YC16 YC5 Main PWB Engine PWB Figure 1-5-62 8. Pin Pin Scanner unit Pin Pin Figure 1-5-63 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-37 . Remove YC5 connector of the main PWB.

Remove the screw and remove the eject cover. Eject cover Screw Figure 1-5-64 10.2KJ/2KH 9. Remove the screw and remove the inner rear cover. Inner rear cover Screw Figure 1-5-65 1-5-38 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Eject tray Both Hook Hook Eject tray Figure 1-5-66 12. Release two hooks and both and then remove the eject tray. 13.2KJ/2KH 11. Connector Screw Screw Screw Screw Laser scanner unit Connector Figure 1-5-67 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-39 . Remove four screws and two connectors and remove the laser scanner unit. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all the removed parts.

Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification. perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment. Is the image correct? No Yes Remove the contact glass. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image. move the frame in the direction of the white arrow ( ). move the frame in the direction of the black arrow ( ). Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass.2KJ/2KH (5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained). Caution: Adjust the deflection in the paper at the registration roller first (see page 1-3-15). End Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-5-68 Screws Figure 1-5-69 1-5-40 Service Manual Y111000-1 . output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment. For copy example 2. For copy example 1. Procedure Start Place the original on the contact glass. Before making the following adjustment. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame. and if it is not obtained.

2KJ/2KH

1-5-4

Drum section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit. Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit. Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove the waste toner box and toner container. 2. Remove the screw holding the developing release lever. 3. Pull the developing release lever and release the developing unit.

Developing release lever

Screw

Figure 1-5-70 4. Remove the screw and the connector and then remove the drum unit. 5. Replace the drum unit and refit all the removed parts. 6. when the periodic maintenance, perform maintenance mode U251 (clearing the maintenance count) (see page 1-3-45).

Connector

Drum unit

Screw

Figure 1-5-71

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-5-41

2KJ/2KH (2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws. Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit. Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). 2. Push the drum separation claws with the minus driver from the top of the hole and remove the claws. 3. Replace the drum separation claws and refit all the removed parts.
Drum separation claw

Hole

Drum separation claw

Drum separation claw Drum separation claw

Figure 1-5-72

1-5-42

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH (3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit. Procedure 1. Open the front cover and remove the waste toner box. 2. While lifting the main charger unit toward the upper right, remove the unit. 3. While pressing the main charger release lever in the direction indicated by the arrow at the removal stopper position to release the removal stopper, remove the main charger unit from the machine. 4. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the removed parts.

Main charger release lever

Main charger unit

Figure 1-5-73

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-5-43

2KJ/2KH

1-5-5

Developing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit. Procedure 1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-41). 2. While lifting the developing unit a little, remove the unit from the machine. 3. Replace the developing unit and refit all the removed parts. 4. Perform maintenance mode U130 (initial setting for the developing unit) (see page 13-36). 5. Perform maintenance mode U157 (clearing the developing drive time) (see page 1-338).

Developing unit

Figure 1-5-74

1-5-44

Service Manual

Y111000-1

2KJ/2KH

1-5-6

Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller. Procedure 1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page 1-5-16). 2. Remove front and rear inserted parts and remove the transfer roller unit from the paper conveying unit.
Transfer roller unit

Paper conveying unit

Inserted part

Figure 1-5-75 3. Remve two collars A, two collars B, gear, two stoppers and two bushes from transfer roller.
Collar A Gear Stopper

Collar B Bush

Transfer roller

Stopper Collar B Collar A Bush

Figure 1-5-76

Y111000-1

Service Manual

1-5-45

When refitting the transfer roller unit. make sure that the transfer springs are securely fit into the protrusions. Transfer roller unit Protrusion Protrusion Transfer spring Transfer spring Figure 1-5-77 1-5-46 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH 4. Replace the transfer roller and refit all the removed parts.

Remove the screw and release three inserted parts and then remove the front left cover. Front left cover Inserted part Inserted part Screw Figure 1-5-78 3. Remove the screw and two connectors and then remove the fuser unit. Connectors Screw Fuser unit Figure 1-5-79 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-47 . Procedure 1.2KJ/2KH 1-5-7 Caution Fuser section (1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit. 2. Open the front cover and left cover.

2KJ/2KH 4. be sure to hitch the fuser thermistor wire to both the notch position and the hook of the fuser unit. Replace the fuser unit and refit all the removed parts. After connecting the connector. Notch position Hook Fuser thermistor wire Figure 1-5-80 1-5-48 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Remove two screws and open the fuser unit. Press roller guide Hook Hook Left fuser unit Screw Figure 1-5-82 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-49 . 3. Remove the screw and release two hooks and then remove the press roller guide from the left fuser unit. Separate the right and left fuser unit. Procedure 1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-47). Screw Screw Fuser unit Right fuser unit Left fuser unit Figure 1-5-81 4.2KJ/2KH (2) Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller. 2.

Press roller Left fuser unit Bush Figure 1-5-83 1-5-50 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Remove the press roller from left fuser unit. When removing it. 6. be careful not to drop and lose the bush. Cautions Remove the press roller carefully not to scratch its surface.2KJ/2KH 5. Replace the press roller and refit all the removed parts.

Separate the right and left fuser unit (see page 1-5-49). 5. Caution Remove the positive terminals while pressing their protrusions. Remove two positive terminals of fuser heater wires from the fuser unit. Remove two fuser heater wires from ribs of the fuser unit. Right fuser unit Fuser heater wire Figure 1-5-85 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-51 . Procedure 1. 3. Caution Make sure that the fuser heater wires are not removed from the positive terminals. Protrusion Fuser unit Positive terminal Fuser heater wire Fuser heater wire Positive terminal Figure 1-5-84 4. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-47).2KJ/2KH (3) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater. Pull out the fuser heater wire from the rear side of the right fuser unit and stretch it straight. 2.

9. Insert the wire between the hooks in the front side of the right fuser unit until it clicks to secure it. 8.2KJ/2KH 6. Right fuser unit Fuser heater Hook Figure 1-5-86 7. Replace the fuser heater. Straighten the fuser heater wire in the rear side of the new fuser heater. Release hooks at the front side of the right fuser unit and pull out the fuser heater. and insert it from the front side of the right fuser unit. Caution Do not touch the glass section of the fuser heater. Fit both the protrusions in the front and rear sides of the fuser heater into the notch positions of the right fuser unit. Protrusion Rear side Hook Hook Protrusion Front side Figure 1-5-87 1-5-52 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Cautions Insert the terminal all the way into the unit. Refit the right and left fuser unit. Connect front and rear positive terminal to thermstats. 11. Right fuser unit Fuser heater wire Right fuser unit Fuser heater wire Figure 1-5-88 12.2KJ/2KH 10. Lace the fuser heater wire in the rear side through the aperture of the right fuser unit and pull it out. To front Positive terminal Rib Fuser heater wire To front Fuser heater wire Rib Positive terminal Figure 1-5-89 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-53 . Push each terminal and heater wire into the housing so as not to exceed the height of the rib of the fuser unit (because they may come in contact with the machine frame at the time of installation of the machine). Put the slack of electric wire toward the front side of the machine.

Heat roller guide Hook Hook Hook Hook Right fuser unit Figure 1-5-90 3. Heat roller separation claw Spring Heat roller separation claws Right fuser unit Figure 1-5-91 1-5-54 Service Manual Y111000-1 . be careful not to scratch the surface of the heat roller. Separate the right and left fuser unit (see page 1-5-49). be careful not to touch the tip of the claw.2KJ/2KH (4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws. Replace the heat roller separation claws and refit all the removed parts. Procedure 1. Remove the springs and remove the heat roller separation claws. Caution When removing them. 4. Caution When fitting the separation claws. Release four hooks and remove the fuser guide from the right fuser unit. 2.

with the heat roller bush in the front side being mounted. 3. Separate the right and left fuser unit (see page 1-5-49). Procedure 1. 2. Heat roller Heat roller bush Heat roller gear Right fuser unit Figure 1-5-93 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-55 . Remove the heat roller separation claws (see page 1-5-54).2KJ/2KH (5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller. 4. heat roller bush and heat roller gear. Remove the heat roller. Remove the fuser heater (see page 1-5-51). Heat roller bush Right fuser unit Figure 1-5-92 5. Press the heat roller bush in the rear side of the right fuser unit from outside to make the roller removable. Caution Remove the heat roller.

push the roller lightly to check that the detection surface of the fuser thermistor comes in contact with the roller. Replace the heat roller and refit all the removed parts. Right fuser unit Fuser thermistor Fuser thermostat Fuser thermostat Heat roller gear Idle gear Figure 1-5-94 1-5-56 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Also make sure that the gears are properly engaged. make sure that the surface of the fuser thermistor is cleaned with alcohol and is not deformed. Refit the heat roller gear while pushing the idle gear in the direction indicated with the arrow.2KJ/2KH 6. After refitting the heat roller. Caution When replacing the heat roller. Also make sure that no foreign matter adheres to the fuser thermostats.

2KJ/2KH (6) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermistor. After refitting the heat roller. Replace the fuser thermistor and refit all the removed parts. Caution Restore the fuser thermistor wire to its original correct position. 4. push the roller lightly to check that the detection surface of the fuser thermistor comes in contact with the roller. 2. Procedure 1. Screw Fuser thermistor Right fuser unit Figure 1-5-95 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-57 . Remove the screw and remove the fuser thermistor. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-5-55). 3. Separate the right and left fuser unit (see page 1-5-49).

Push each terminal and heater wire into the housing so as not to exceed the height of the rib of the fuser unit (because they may come in contact with the machine frame at the time of installation of the machine). Procedure 1. 2. Screw Screw Fuser thermostat Positive terminal Positive terminal Figure 1-5-96 5. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-47).7 to 1. 4. conduct continuity check for the thermostat. Replace the fuser thermostat and refit all the removed parts. If C6000 or C6020 occurs. replace the thermostat after resolving the problem. Reference value: 0. Remove two positive terminals from fuser thermostat.7 to 1. Put the slack of electric wire toward the front side of the machine. If the cause is not found.5 mm 0. Use a thickness gauge to check that the clearance between the fuser thermostat and the heat roller is within the reference value.2KJ/2KH (7) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermostat Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermostat.5 mm Figure 1-5-97 1-5-58 Service Manual Y111000-1 . do not replace only the component in question but the entire unit. 3. Cautions Be sure to replace it after finding the cause of failure. Cautions Insert the terminal all the way into the unit. Remove two screws and remove the fuser thermostat. Before replacement.

Is the image correct? No Yes End Remove the front left cover (see page 1-5-47). Tighten the screws. For copy example 2: Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow ( ) to lower the front position of the fuser unit. Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 % magnification. Original Copy example 1 Copy example 2 Figure 1-5-98 Screw Adjusting spacer Fuser unit Figure 1-5-99 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-59 . For copy example 1: Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow ( ) to raise the front position of the fuser unit. Refit the front left cover. Loosen the screw holding the fuser unit.2KJ/2KH (8) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness) Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer. Procedure Start Place the original on the contact glass.

Remove the rear cover (see page 1-5-6). 3. Screw Eject unit Inserted part Figure 1-5-101 1-5-60 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Remove the wire of the connector from clamp and ribs. Remove the eject cover (see page 1-5-38). Slide the eject unit toward the front side and pull out the inserted part section. Remove the screw. Remove the left middle cover (see page 1-526). Procedure 1. 2. 7. 6. Remove YC14 connector of the engine PWB. 5.2KJ/2KH 1-5-8 Others (1) Detaching and refitting the eject unit Follow the procedure below to replace the eject unit. YC14 Connector Rib Rib Clamp Engine PWB Figure 1-5-100 4. Remove the front left cover (see page 1-547).

Replace the eject unit and refit all the removed parts. 9.2KJ/2KH 8. pull at the rear side of the unit first. and remove the unit from the machine. Lift the eject unit. Eject unit Figure 1-5-102 Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-5-61 .

Cooling fan motor 1 (Rating label: outside) Exhaust Intake Cooling fan motor 2 (Rating label: inside) Figure 1-5-103 1-5-62 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH (2) Direction of installing the principal fan motors When detaching or refitting the cooling fan motor 1 or 2. be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).

Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. 11. Caution: Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading. Upgrading firmware starts. 5. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check that U019 ROM version has been upgraded. Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on. Insert the surface of Compact Flash toward the machine rear. Firmware upgrading requires the following tools: Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended. 9. [Completed] is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete. 2. Remove the screw and remove the slot cover.) NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer. Turn the main power switch off and unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 10. 4. Refit the slot cover. engine and MMI. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. 7. Procedure 1. 3. Perform maintenance item U000 (maintenance report output) and check U019 ROM version. Compact Flash Screw Slot cover Figure 1-6-1 6. Y111000-1 Service Manual 1-6-1 .2KJ/2KH 1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main. Make sure that the Power lamp is off before turning off the main power switch. Press the power key on the operation panel to off. Remove Compact Flash from the machine. be sure to format it in advance. 8.

High voltage PWB: VR401 APC PWB: VR1 1-6-3 Remarks on main PWB and engine PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB or engine PWB.2KJ/2KH 1-6-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field. remove the EEPROM (YS3) or EEPROM (U3) from the PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new PWB. EEPROM Main PWB EEPROM (YS3) EEPROM (U3) Engine PWB EEPROM Figure 1-6-2 1-6-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

7 8 9 2 1 4 5 11 6 17 12 18 14 13 16 19 20 15 3 10 Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) Forwarding pulley Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Cassette base MP paper feed pulley MP separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller Registration switch (RSW) Paper switch (PSW) MP paper switch (MPPSW) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) MP paper size width switch (MPPWSW) Cassette forwarding pulley* Cassette paper feed pulley* Cassette separation pulley* Cassette base* Feed pulley* Feed roller* Cassette feed switch (CFSW)* Cassette paper switch (CPSW)* *: 22 ppm model only. The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time.2KJ/2KH 2-1 Mechanical construction 2-1-1 Paper feed section The paper feed section conveys paper from the cassette (one cassette is standard for 18 ppm model/two cassettes are standard for 22 ppm model) or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers. via the torque limiter. The MP tray can hold up to 100 (80 g/m2) sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing. Cassette can hold up to 300 (80 g/m2) sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP paper feed pulley. Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-1 .

2KJ/2KH RCL REGCLM YC6-2 CPWB RSW PFCL PSW C1PDSWN FCLTN REGSW YC2-2 YC7-2 YC5-10 YC5-12 YC5-2 MPPWSW MPPSW BPWSW BPPESW CPFCL CPSW YC1 PE CFSW YC5-2 YC7 EPWB CMPWB CLT_RE FEED YC8-2 YC6-2 YC3 YC9 Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram 2-1-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning. When the DP is used. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. (1) Image scanner section The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) in the image scanning unit via the three mirrors.2KJ/2KH 2-1-2 Optical section The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner section for printing. the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal. The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side. 12 6 13 3 2 1 11 10 7 5 4 14 15 8 9 Figure 2-1-3 Image scanner section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Mirror 1 frame Exposure lamp (EL) Mirror 1 Scanner reflector Mirror 2 frame Mirror 2 Mirror 3 ISU (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) CCD PWB (CCDPWB) ISU cover Contact glass Slit glass Home position switch (HPSW) Original detection switch (ODSW) Original size detection sensor (OSDS) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-3 .

2KJ/2KH Original HPSW ODSW OSDS SM Lens CCDPWB EL CCD image sensor INPWB YC5-B5 YC16-4 LAMPN YC5 OPSWN Serial communication data signal MPWB YC7 YC5-B8 YC1 EPWB YC5-B2 YC15-1 YC15-2 YC15-3 YC15-4 ORGLSWN ISMDA ISMDB ISMDNA ISMDNB Figure 2-1-4 Image scanner section block diagram 2-1-4 Service Manual Reading image data HPSWN Y111000-1 .

2KJ/2KH (2) Laser scanner section The image data scanned by the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) is processed on the main PWB (MPWB) and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). 10 7 9 6 5 8 3 2 4 1 Figure 2-1-5 Laser scanner section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) APC PWB (APCPWB) Laser diode Cylindrical lens Polygon motor (PM) Polygon mirror fθ lens fθ lens PD sensor mirror Cylindrical correcting lens PD PWB (PDPWB) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-5 . By repeatedly turning the laser on and off. the laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface.

2KJ/2KH Laser scanner unit (LSU) PDPWB PM PLGCLKN PLGRDYN YC3-A1 YC3-A2 YC3-A3 Drum Polygon mirror PLGDRN EPWB Laser diode APCPWB PDN OUTPEN SAMPLEN VDON VDOP YC6-1 YC6-3 YC6-4 YC6-5 YC6-6 MPWB Figure 2-1-6 Laser scanner section block diagram 2-1-6 Service Manual YC7 Serial communication data signal YC1 Y111000-1 .

main charger section. 6 7 8 9 2 3 1 5 4 Figure 2-1-7 Drum section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Drum Drum separation claws Main charger unit Main charger wire Main charger grid Cleaning roller Cleaning spiral Cleaning blade Cleaning lamp (CL) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-7 . The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface. cleaning section and cleaning lamp. The main charger section consists of main charger wire and main charger grid. and the drum is charged by a high voltage applied to the main charger wire. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and cleaning roller that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process. and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box.2KJ/2KH 2-1-3 Drum section The drum section consists of the drum.

2KJ/2KH ERASE2N CL ERASE1N YC3-B6 YC3-B7 Main charging high voltage CN1-7 MHVDRN YC8-7 HVTPWB Grid Drum TONEFULL EPWB OFS Zener PWB YC3-B2 DRM DDMREM YC6-11 Figure 2-1-8 Drum section block diagram 2-1-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Also.2KJ/2KH 2-1-4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container. 2 3 1 6 8 4 5 7 Figure 2-1-9 Developing section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Developing unit Developing sleeve Magnetic toner blade Left developing spiral Right developing spiral Toner container Toner container sensor (TCS) Toner container detection switch (TCDSW) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-9 . the magnetic toner blade and the developing spirals that agitate the toner. The developing unit consists of the developing sleeve where a magnetic brush is formed. the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container.

2KJ/2KH Drum Developing sleeve Developing bias HVTPWB EPWB CN1-9 DHVCLKC YC8-9 TCDSW TCONDET YC9-B7 YC7 YC1 TCS TONEPY YC3-2 CPWB Figure 2-1-10 Developing section block diagram 2-1-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

Magnetic toner blade Toner South pole Drum North pole Developing sleeve Figure 2-1-11 Single component developing system Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-11 . On the other hand. toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed. toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. and reversal processing is performed with a + charged drum and a + charged magnetic toner.2KJ/2KH (1) Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system. when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum. When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large. an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve. Then. With the single component developing system. on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light. on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light. toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and + charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum. Development is complete. toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole.

A high voltage generated by the high voltage PWB (HVTPWB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging.2KJ/2KH 2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation sections consists of the transfer roller. separation electrode and drum separation claws. Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high voltage PWB (HVTPWB) to the separation electrode. 3 2 4 1 Figure 2-1-12 Transfer and separation sections (1) (2) (3) (4) Transfer roller Separation electrode Drum separation claw Drum EPWB HVTPWB Separation high voltage Separation electrode YC8-6 YC8-8 YC8-3 YC8-4 SHVDRN SHVISELN THVADJC THVDRN CN1-6 CN1-8 CN1-3 CN1-4 Transfe high voltage Drum Transfer roller Figure 2-1-13 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2-1-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

5 2 8 3 7 9. fuser thermostat (FTS) operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off. The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters M and S (FH-M/S) inside it. its surface temperature is detected by the fuser thermistor (FTH) and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off. When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller. the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed to eject and switchback section. Pressure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted. which is heated by fuser heaters M and S (FH-M/S). 10 6 1 4 Figure 2-1-14 Fuser section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Left fuser unit Right fuser unit Press roller Heat roller Heat roller separation claws (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Fuser heater M (FH-M) Fuser heater S (FH-S) Fuser thermistor (FTH) Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1) Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-13 . fused and fixed onto the paper.2KJ/2KH 2-1-6 Fuser section The fuser section consists of the parts shown in figure. If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot. When the fuser process is completed.

2KJ/2KH YC3-B9 THERMA FTH FH-S FH-M FTS1 Heat roller FTS2 EPWB YC4-2 YC4-1 YC18-1 YC18-3 MHREM SHREM YC2-7 YC2-5 PSPWB Figure 2-1-15 Fuser section block diagram 2-1-14 Service Manual YC4-3 LIVE MH SH Y111000-1 .

6 4 8 2 5 1 7 3 Figure 2-1-16 Eject and switchback sections (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Feedshift guide Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Feedshift guide Eject switch (ESW) Feedshift switch (FSSW) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-15 . In duplex copying.2KJ/2KH 2-1-7 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fuser has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor. . paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor.

2KJ/2KH EPWB SEPSWN COMDA COMDB COMDNA COMDNB EXTSWN FSSW YC14-3 YC13-1 YC13-2 YC13-3 YC13-4 YC14-2 EM ESW Figure 2-1-17 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2-1-16 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

after copying on to the reverse face of the paper. The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers.2KJ/2KH 2-1-8 Duplex section In duplex mode. 1 3 2 6 4 5 Figure 2-1-18 Duplex section (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Feedshift guide Duplex feed pulley Upper duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley Lower duplex feed roller Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-1-17 . the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex unit.

2KJ/2KH EPWB YC7 YC1 DUP PCSW IPPSWN YC5-5 DUPFCL ICLTN YC5-8 CPWB Figure 2-1-19 Duplex section block diagram 2-1-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

.......... 5....... 11... compresses.. Cassette heater PWB (CHPWB)*1. Power source PWB (PSPWB) ........................... LCD PWB (LCDPWB).................... Controls the operation panel and laser scanner unit............... and converts resolution of image data.............. Controls LCD indication.. Generates high voltages for transfer and high voltages for separation................... electrical components and optional devices.. 9...... Modulates. 3.... Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam........ Engine PWB (EPWB)............ Cassette main PWB (CMPWB)*1.. 14.. Relays wirings from electrical components.. Cassette PWB (CPWB) ..... decompresses and smoothes out image data... 7................................................ 4.. Generates and controls the laser beam..2KJ/2KH 2-2 Electrical Parts Layout 2-2-1 Electrical parts layout (1) PWBs 5 6 1 2 14 4 7 8 10 9 15 16 3 11 12 13 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-1 PWBs 1...... Controls the exposure lamp................. Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-2-1 ....... 12. Generates +24 V DC...... Relays the cassette heater power.... Controls the other PWBs........ 2............... CCD PWB (CCDPWB)..... High voltage PWB (HVTPWB) ...... Main charging..... controls the fuser heaters....... 13.............. demodulates....... Reads the image of originals.............. Inverter PWB (INPWB) .......... APC PWB (APCPWB) . Controls electrical components of the paper feeder... 8............................... 6...... Fax control PWB (FCPWB)*2....... PD PWB (PDPWB) ....... Operation unit PWB (OPWB)..... 10...... Main PWB (MPWB) . Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs..............

*1: Option for 18 ppm model/standard for 22 ppm model *2: Option List of correspondences of PWB names No. Fax relay PWB (FRPWB)*2....... Controls connection to the telephone line..................A) / NCU ASS'Y(CTR) PARTS PWB MAIN-FAX-IF ASSY SP 2-2-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Name used in service manual Engine PWB (EPWB) Main PWB (MPWB) Power source PWB (PSPWB) High voltage PWB (HVPWB) Inverter PWB (INPWB) CCD PWB (CCDPWB) Operation PWB (OPWB) LCD PWB (LCDPWB) APC PWB (APCPWB) PD PWB (PDPWB) Cassette PWB (CPWB) Cassette main PWB (CMPWB) Cassette heater PWB (CHPWB) Fax control PWB (FCPWB) NCU PWB (NCUPWB) Fax relay PWB (FRPWB) Name used in parts list PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP PARTS LVU100(M) SP / PARTS LVU200(M) SP PARTS HVU SP PARTS LAMP INVERTER SP PARTS PWB PANEL ASSY SP PARTS LCD OPERATION SP PARTS PWB INTERFACE ASSY SP PARTS PWB PF MAIN ASSY SP HEATER BRANCH PCB ASS'Y PARTS MAIN FAX ASSY SP NCU ASS'Y(N.. 16.............. NCU PWB (NCUPWB)*2..2KJ/2KH 15.. Consists of wiring relay circuits between fax control PWB and main PWB...............

... Fuser thermistor (FTH) ....... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing. Paper size width switch (PWSW).... Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-2-3 ... 9.. 3................. Detects the presence of paper in the cassette... 14........................... Detects the heat roller temperature. 7............. 6................ 16.......... Feedshift switch (FSSW) .. Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened............................ Detects the length of paper in the cassette.............. Toner container detection switch (TCDSW) .... 5.. Paper size length switch (PLSW) ............ 8...... Left cover safety switch (LCSSW) ........ 4.................. Front cover safety switch (FCSSW)................ 2... Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy. 17.... Paper switch (PSW).... 12.... Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover is opened. 13.. Detects the optical system in the home position.. 10............. Detects the size of the original........ Turns the AC power on and off........ 11........... Detects the presence of the toner container...... Operates the original size detection sensor....................... Detects the width of paper on the MP tray.......... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container..... Home position switch (HPSW).... Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ............. Toner container sensor (TCS) ... Registration switch (RSW) ......................2KJ/2KH (2) Switches and sensors 8 9 10 3 13 12 17 24 2 16 15 11 7 6 18 14 1 4 5 19 21 20 23 22 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors 1.............................. MP paper size width switch (MPPWSW) ... Overflow sensor (OFS) .. Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section........... Main power switch (MSW) ................ Original detection switch (ODSW) . Detects the width of paper in the cassette... Eject switch (ESW) ... Detects when the waste toner box is full.. 15.......

.. Detects a paper misfeed... Detects the length of paper in the cassette......... 20..... Detects the width of paper in the cassette.... Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*2 ........................ Detects a paper jam in the duplex section.. Cassette paper switch (CPSW)*1 ............. Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray... Detects the presence of paper in the cassette...................................... 22.. 24........................................... *1: Option for 18 ppm model/standard for 22 ppm model *2: Option 2-2-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 .......... Cassette paper size length switch (CPLSW)*1 .................................................. MP paper switch (MPPSW) .2KJ/2KH 18. Cassette feed switch (CFSW)*1 .. Cassette left cover safety switch (CLCSSW)*1 .......... Cassette paper size width switch (CPWSW)*1 ................... 23........ Breaks the safety circuit when the cassette left cover is opened............ 19.. 21...........

.. 8. Drives the paper feeder....... Drives the eject section...... 7............................. Drum motor (DRM) .............. 5..... Cassette drive motor (CDM)*1 ....... Scanner motor (SM).............. Drives the machine.... 3..... 6......................... 2......... 4....................... Drives the optical system......... Cools the machine interior........................................2KJ/2KH (3) Motors 4 3 5 6 2 7 1 8 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-3 Motors 1... Polygon motor (PM) ... Drives the polygon mirror.................. Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) . Drives the drum............ *1: Option for 18 ppm model/standard for 22 ppm model Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-2-5 .......... Eject motor (EM) ....... Drive motor (DM) ....... Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ................... Cools the machine interior..

................ *1: Option for 18 ppm model/standard for 22 ppm model *2: Option 2-2-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 ..... Registration clutch (RCL)......... Primary paper feed from the MP tray................ Exposes originals... Paper feed clutch (PFCL) ......... Cassette heater (CH)*1 .. 5................. 9 5 13 2 3 1 10 12 11 Machine front Machine inside Machine rear Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components 1. Primary paper feed from the cassette.......... Cassette heater (CH) .................. 8........... 13................ 12................... Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2)........................... 7....................... Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)*2.... Fuser heater S (FH-S) ............ Prevents overheating in the fuser section........... 4. Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller....................... MP solenoid (MPSOL) ............ 2............ Dehumidifies the cassette section. 9..... Secondary paper feed.... Exposure lamp (EL) ...... Dehumidifies the cassette section. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1).... 3..... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.... Cleaning lamp (CL) ...2KJ/2KH (4) Others 4 7 6 8......... 11............ Prevents overheating in the fuser section............ 10.. Primary paper feed from the cassette.............. Cassette paper feed clutch (CPFCL)*1 ....... Heats the heat roller.... Fuser heater M (FH-M) .... 6........ Heats the heat roller...........................

2KJ/2KH 2-3 Operation of the PWBs 2-3-1 Power source PWB YC4 YC2 YC1 TB4 TB3 YC3 TB1 TB2 Figure 2-3-1 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-1 .

3 V DC 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector TB Connected to the AC inlet and main power switch Pin No.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal YC4 Connected to the fuser heater M/S 2-3-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 .3 V DC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC AC power input AC power input AC power output to MSW AC power input from MSW Ground 24 V DC power output to EPWB 24 V DC power output to EPWB 24 V DC power output to EPWB Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to EPWB Relay signal Ground FH-S: On/Off Sleep signal: On/Off FH-M: On/Off AC power output to CH AC power output to CH Not used AC power output to CH (paper feeder) AC power output to CH (paper feeder) FH-M: On/Off FH-S: On/Off AC power output to FM-M/S Description YC1 Connected to the engine PWB 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC2 Connected to the engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC3 Connected to the cassette heater and paper feeder 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 Signal AC_LIVE AC_COM LIVE LIVE GND +24V +24V +24V GND GND +24V2 ZCROSS RELAYREM GND SHREM SLEEP MHREM LIVE LIVE NC NEUTRAL NEUTRAL MH SH LIVE I/O I I O I O O O O O I I I I O O O O O O O Voltage 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 120 V AC 220-240 V AC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

2KJ/2KH 2-3-2 Main PWB 13 1 1 16 1 11 1 16 2 YC3 20 5 1 YS1 13 U58 U9 U57 U56 1 YC14 YC16 U63 B49 B50 A49 A50 YC15 YC5 U42 U64 B1 B2 A1 A2 1 19 YC2 YC4 U24 12 U59 U8 YC12 U18 U41 YC9 1 U29 U4 1 U55 U54 U52 U53 U21 U20 U19 U6 U27 U22 U38 U28 U26 U23 31 30 50 YC13 YS3 U75 U71 26 1 50 25 BAT1 U1 U2 U74 U73 U72 U70 YC17 60 1 U36 U34 U32 U30 U35 U33 20 U31 B2 B1 A2 A1 U51 U50 YC7 1 U66 U65 YS4 YC18 U67 YC19 B30 B29 A30 A29 U7 U45 U61 U43 U60 U85 YC1 U76 32 5 1 U68 U81 YC10 2 U49 U47 U48 U46 LED1 U62 LED2 U11 2 U5 YC21 U3 1 10 1 1 2 1 YS2 7 YC20 31 1 YC6 YC8 YC22 Figure 2-3-2 Main PWB silk-screen diagram Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-3 .

3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB clock signal 0/3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC6 Connected to the APC PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC7 Connected to the engine PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 5V NC TG GND RS GND CP GND PHY2 GND GND Vout1 Vout2 GND NC CCDPWR PDN SGND OUTREN SAMPLEN VDON VDOP 5V1 _RST_ENG SCANHLD ENGHLD AFEOVSYNC GND _24V_DOWN PVSYNC GND EGOUTPEN PLGCLK SLEEP GND EGSIRN EGSDIR GND EGSBSY EGSDO_BUF GND EGSCLK_BUF EGSDI O I O O O O O O O O I I I I O O I I I O O I Signal I/O O O I O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC5 Connected to the CCD PWB Pin No.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB serial communication data signal 2-3-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog Analog 12 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCD clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Voltage 5 V DC Not used CCD control signal Ground CCD control signal Ground CCD control signal Ground Ground Ground CCD output signal CCD output signal Ground Not used 12 V DC power output to CCDPWB Laser sync signal Ground Laser diode output signal Sample hold signal Image data signal Image data signal 5 V DC power output to APCPWB EPWB reset signal EPWB hold signal EPWB hold signal Ground EPWB 24 V down signal Ground Laser diode output signal EPWB sleep signal Ground EPWB interrupt signal EPWB communication direction signal Ground EPWB busy siganal Ground Description 5 V DC power output to CCDPWB 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC10 Connected to the fax control PWB (fax relay PWB) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 +5V +5V +5V GND +3.3V GND GND GND +5V GND 5V CLKOUT 5V GND MREOUT _HSYNCOUT GND _VSYNCOUT _IDOUT GND GND TXD _STS _MAIN_STS FAXDOWN MREIN GND _VSYNCIN CLKIN GND GND _IDIN _SET _SREQ _READY RXD GND _RST GND _W_UP +24VSL Signal I/O I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I I I O I O Voltage 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC8 Connected to the engine PWB Pin No.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC Description 5 V DC power input from EPWB 5 V DC power input from EPWB 5 V DC power input from EPWB Ground 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FCPWB clock siganal 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power input from EPWB Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power input from EPWB Ground 5 V DC power output to FCPWB 5 V DC power output to FCPWB Ground FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal Ground FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal Ground Ground FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal Ground FCPWB control siganal Ground Ground FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal FCPWB control siganal FCPWB ready signal Ground FCPWB reset signal Ground FCPWB control siganal 24 V DC power output to FCPWB 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FCPWB received data signal Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-5 .3 V DC (pulse) FCPWB transmission data signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) FCPWB clock siganal 0/3.3 V DC power input from EPWB 3.3V +3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 9 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 3 0/3.3 V DC LCD indicator control signal LCD indicator control signal Ground LCD indicator control signal Ground LCD indicator control signal LCD indicator control signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD indicator data signal 1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD indicator data signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 5 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC power output to OPWB OPWB buzzer signal Ground 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC14 Connected to the LCD PWB Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 YC15 Connected to the operation PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC16 Connected to the operation PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC22 Connected to the power source PWB 1 2 +5V -12V LCDUD3 LCDUD2 LCDUD1 LCDUD0 LCDCP LCDFLM GND LCDENB GND LCDLP LCDV0 SCAN7 SCAN6 SCAN5 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN2 SCAN1 SCAN0 +5V BUZERDRN SGND KEY0 KEY1 KEY2 KEY3 KEY4 KEY5 KEY6 KEY7 KEY8 KEY9 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LED0 POWERKEY +24V GND Signal I/O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O I I Voltage 5 V DC 12 V DC Description 5 V DC power output to LCDPWB 12 V DC power output to LCDPWB 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD indicator data signal 0 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 6 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 8 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 1 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC Power key input 24 V DC power input from PSPWB Ground 2-3-6 Service Manual Y111000-1 .3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 0 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 5 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD indicator data signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 7 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

2KJ/2KH 2-3-3 Engine PWB 5 1 4 1 11 10 1 2 B1 B12 YC15 YC24 2 1 6 YC16 2 YC8 A12 YC5 A1 1 YC4 YC12 4 U11 U8 YC26 5 U7 YC10 1 2 1 U6 1 A9 14 13 B1 YC14 4 U9 YC3 YC22 U3 A1 1 YC13 1 B9 4 U10 YC20 1 2 YC6 1 1 5 1 YC2 U1 7 16 15 20 19 U2 U12 YC1 YC23 1 YC19 U14 U13 2 1 U5 5 10 9 21 8 U4 YC25 1 2 YC17 1 YC18 7 2 YC7 A8 22 A9 YC9 1 A2 A1 1 23 B2 B1 B8 B9 Figure 2-3-3 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-7 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC MPWB hold signal MPWB hold signal Ground MPWB 24V down signal Ground Laser diode output signal MPWB sleep signal Ground MPWB interrupt signal MPWB communication direction signal Ground MPWB busy signal Ground Description MPWB reset signal 0/3. overflow sensor. cleaning lamp and fuser thermistor A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Signal _RST_ENG SCANHLD ENGHLD AFEOVSYNC GND _24V_DOWN PVSYNC GND EGOUTPEN PLGCLK SLEEP GND EGSIRN EGSDIR GND EGSBSY EGSDO_BUF GND EGSCLK_BUF EGSDI PLGCLKN PLGRDYN PLGDRN PLGGND PLG+24V1 FAN1DRN FAN1+24V1 NC NC TONEGND TONEFULL TONE+5V2 ERASE+24V1 NC ERASE2N ERASE1N THERMAGND THERMA I/O I I I O O O O I I O o O I I O O I O O O O I O O O O I Voltage 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC Analog PM ready signal PM: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power output to PM CFM1: On/Off 24 V DC power output to CFM1 Not used Not used Ground OFS: On/Off 5 V DC power output to OFS 24 V DC power output to CL Not used CL: On/Off CL: On/Off Ground FTH detection signal 2-3-8 Service Manual Y111000-1 . cooling fan motor 1.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB serial communication data signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 YC3 Connected to the polygon motor.2KJ/2KH Connector YC1 Connected to the main PWB Pin No.3 V DC (pulse) PM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.

3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Description FSSOL: On/Off (return) FSSOL: On/Off (activate) Built-in finisher/Job separator clock signal Built-in finisher serial communication data signal / Job separator JBESW: On/Off Built-in finisher/Job separator serial communication data signal Built-in finisher ready signal / Job separator EPDSW: On/Off Built-in finisher/Job separator select signal Ground 5 V DC power output to built-in finisher/Job separator Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to built-in finisher/Job separator 24 V DC power output to built-in finisher/Job separator Original scanning interval signal Document processor ready signal Document processor select signal Ground Document processor clock signal Document processor serial communication data signal Document processor serial communication data signal 5 V DC power output to document processor Ground Ground 24 V DC power output to document processor Not used 5 V DC power output to OSDS OSDS: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power output to HPSW HPSW: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power output to ODSW ODSW: On/Off Ground Not used Not used Not used Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-9 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 YC5 Connected to the document processor. original size detection sensor.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3. home position sensor and original detection switch A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 Signal RLSOLN SLSOLN UOPSCLK UOPSDI UOPSDO UOPSRDY UOPSEL SGND +5V4 PGND PGND +24V1 +24V1 ORGTIMN DOPRDY DOPSEL SGND DOPCLK DOPSDI DOPSDO +5V4 PGND PGND +24V1 NC +5V4 ORGLSWN SGND +5V4 HPSWN SGND +5V4 OPSWN SGND NC NC NC I/O O O O I O I O O O O I I O O I O O O O I O I O I Voltage 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) DC0V/5(þ?Ÿ¾) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 5 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC4 Connected to the builtin finisher or job separator Pin No.

3V NC +24V2 PGND DDMREM DDMCLK PGND DDMRDY PGND NC TEMP HMCLK1 HMCLK2 HUMID C1PWSWN C1PDSWN +5V2 TONEPY SGND BPWSW REGSWN ICLTN IPPSWN BPPESW SGND BSOLN FCLTN REGCLN +24V1 +24V1 +3.3V I/O O O O O I O O O O I I O O I I I O I I I O I I O O O O O O 0/24 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) DM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) HUMS clock signal 0/3.3V MDMRDY 3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 YC7 Connected to the cassette PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 Signal +24V2 PGND MDMREM MDMCLK 3.3 V DC power output to DM Not used 24 V DC power output to DRM Ground DRM: On/Off Ground DRM ready signal Ground Not used HUMS detection signal Description 24 V DC power output to DM 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) HUMS clock signal Analog 0/3.3 V DC power output to DM DM ready signal 3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC6 Connected to the drive motor and drum motor Pin No.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC HUMS detection signal PWSW: On/Off PSW: On/Off 5 V DC power output to CPWB TCS detection signal Ground MPPWSW: On/Off RSW: On/Off DUPFCL: On/Off DUPPCSW: On/Off MPPSW: On/Off Ground MPSOL: On/Off PFCL: On/Off RCL: On/Off 24 V DC power output to CPWB 24 V DC power output to CPWB 3.3 V DC (pulse) DRM clock signal 0/3.3 V DC Analog Voltage Ground DM: On/Off 3.3 V DC 5 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC power output to CPWB 2-3-10 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developing bias clock signal 1 2 3 4 1 2 +24V1 KEYCN SGND KEYENBN COMDA COMDB O O I O O 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC Analog 0/3. paper size length switch and toner container detection switch A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 YC10 Connected to the cooling fan motor 2 YC12 Connected to the key counter YC13 Connected to the eject motor 1 2 Signal +24V2 +24V2 THVADJC THVDRN MHVADJC SHVDRN MHVDRN SHVISELN DHVCLKC PGND PGND LOPSRDY LOPSEL2 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL0 LOPSCLK LOPSDI LOPSDO SGND +5V2PF SGND +5V2PF C1PLSW3N C1PLSW2N SGND C1PLSW1N TCONDET SGND NC FAN2+24V1 FAN2DRN I/O O O O O O O O O O I O O O O I O O O I I I I O O Voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC Analog 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC8 Connected to the high voltage PWB Pin No.3 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC power output to key counter Key counter signal Ground Key counter detection signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal 3 4 COMDNA COMDNB O O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-11 .3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC Description 24 V DC power output to HVTPWB 24 V DC power output to HVTPWB Transfer high voltage control signal Transfer high voltage: On/Off Main charger high voltage control signal Separation high voltage: On/Off Main charger high voltage: On/Off Separation high voltage switching signal Ground Ground Paper feeder ready signal Paper feeder select signal 2 Paper feeder select signal 1 Paper feeder select signal 0 Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder PLSW: On/Off PLSW: On/Off Ground PLSW: On/Off TCDSW: On/Off Ground Not used 24 V DC power output to CFM2 CFM2: On/Off 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC9 Connected to the paper feeder.

3 V DC power output to MPWB 3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal 2-3-12 Service Manual Y111000-1 . left cover safety switch and front cover safety switch YC18 Connected to the power source PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 YC23 Connected to the main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 YC25 Connected to the paper feeder 1 2 Signal PGND EXTSWN SEPSWN +5V4 ISMDA ISMDB ISMDNA ISMDNB +24V1 +24V1 NC LAMPN PGND PGND +24V +24V +24V1 PGND +24VIL1 +24VIL1 PGND +24VIL2 MHREM SLEEP SHREM SGND RELAYREM ZCROSS +24V2 +5V +5V +5V SGND +3.3V +3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC Voltage Ground ESW: On/Off FSSW: On/Off 5 V DC power output to ESW/FSSW Description 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC14 Connected to the eject switch and feedshift switch YC15 Connected to the scanner motor YC16 Connected to the inverter PWB Pin No.3V GND GND GND +5V3 PGND +24V1 I/O O O O O O O O O O O I I O I O I O O O O I I O O O O O O O 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to INPWB 24 V DC power output to INPWB Not used EL: On/Off Ground Ground 24 V DC power input from PSPWB 24 V DC power input from PSPWB 24 V DC power output to LCSSW Ground 24 V DC power input from LCSSW 24 V DC power output to FCSSW Ground 24 V DC power input from FCSSW FH-M: On/Off Sleep signal: On/Off FH-S: On/Off Ground Relay signal 24 V DC power input from PSPWB 5 V DC power output to MPWB 5 V DC power output to MPWB 5 V DC power output to MPWB Ground 3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to MPWB Ground Ground Ground 5 V DC power output to MPWB Ground 24 V DC power output to paper feeder 0/3. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 YC17 Connected to the power source PWB.

2KJ/2KH 2-3-4 Cassette PWB SW1 YC6 1 YC7 2 1 YC8 2 1 YC1 4 23 YC4 1 1 3 YC2 1 2 1 3 TH2 TH1 YC3 1 YC5 13 Figure 2-3-4 Cassette PWB silk-screen diagram Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-13 .

3 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC Analog HUMS detection signal PWSW: On/Off PSW: On/Off 5 V DC power input from EPWB TCS detection signal Ground MPPWSW: On/Off RSW: On/Off DUPFCL: On/Off DUPPCSW: On/Off MPPSW: On/Off Ground MPSOL: On/Off PFCL: On/Off RCL: On/Off 24 V DC power input from EPWB 24 V DC power input from EPWB 3.3 V DC Analog 0/3.3V O I O I O O O I I O 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 3.3 V DC 5 V DC Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPPSW MPPSW: On/Off Ground 5 V DC power output to MPPCSW DUPPCSW: On/Off Ground 24 V DC power output to DUPFCL DUPFCL: On/Off 5 V DC power output to RSW RSW: On/Off Ground MPPWSW: On/Off 3. duplex feed clutch. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 23 YC2 Connected to the paper switch YC3 Connected to the toner container sensor YC5 Connected to the MP paper switch.3V SGND C1PDSWN +5V2 +5V2 TONEPY SGND I/O O I I O O O I O O O I O O I I I I I I I O O I Voltage Analog 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3. duplex paper conveying switch.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 0/3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC (pulse) Not used 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC1 Connected to the engine PWB Pin No.3 V DC (pulse) HUMS clock signal Analog 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 5 V DC 0/3.3 V DC power input from EPWB Ground PSW: On/Off 5 V DC power output to PSW 5 V DC power output to TCS TCS detection signal Ground Description HUMS detection signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 +5V2 BPPESW SGND +5V2 IPPSWN SGND +24V1 ICLTN +5V2 REGSW SGND BPWSW +3.3 V DC power output to MPPWSW 2-3-14 Service Manual Y111000-1 . registration switch and MP paper size width switch 1 2 3 1 2 3 Signal TEMP HMCLK1 HMCLK2 HUMID C1PWSWN C1PDSWN +5V2 TONEPY SGND BPWSW REGSWN ICLTN IPPSWN BPPESW SGND BSOLN FCLTN REGCLN +24V1 +24V1 +3.

1 2 Signal +24V1 REGCLN I/O O O Voltage 24 V DC 0/24 V DC RCL: On/Off Description 24 V DC power output to RCL 1 2 +24V1 FCLTN O O 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFCL PFCL: On/Off 1 2 BSOLN +24V1 O O 0/24 V DC 24 V DC MPSOL: On/Off 24 V DC power output to MPSOL Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-15 .2KJ/2KH Connector YC6 Connected to the registration clutch YC7 Connected to the paper feed clutch YC8 Connected to the MP solenoid Pin No.

2-3-5 2-3-16 2KJ/2KH Operation PWB 11 YC1 DL14 BZ1 DL30 DL31 DL32 DL33 1 SW69 16 DL36 SW50 SW51 1 YC2 DL37 SW52 DL38 DL40 SW68 DL1 SW1 SW6 SW12 SW18 SW24 DL2 SW2 DL7 DL11 SW31 DL8 DL12 SW32 DL9 DL13 SW33 SW39 DL19 DL21 DL22 DL18 SW41 DL20 SW42 SW43 SW38 SW44 SW37 SW7 SW13 SW19 SW25 DL15 SW35 DL16 DL6 DL10 DL17 SW30 SW36 DL34 SW53 DL35 SW54 SW57 SW61 SW65 SW8 SW14 SW20 SW26 DL3 SW3 SW58 SW62 SW66 SW45 SW55 SW59 SW63 DL39 Figure 2-3-5 Operation PWB silk-screen diagram DL23 DL25 DL27 DL29 DL24 DL26 DL28 SW56 SW34 SW46 SW40 SW47 SW48 SW49 Service Manual SW9 SW15 SW21 SW27 DL4 SW4 SW10 SW16 SW22 SW28 DL5 SW5 SW11 SW17 SW23 SW29 SW60 SW64 SW67 Y111000-1 .

3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1 0/3.2KJ/2KH Connector YC1 Connected to the main PWB Pin No.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0 5 V DC 0/3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC2 Connected to the main PWB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal SCAN7 SCAN6 SCAN5 SCAN4 SCAN3 SCAN2 SCAN1 SCAN0 +5V BUZERDRN SGND POWERKEY LED0 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 KEY9 KEY8 KEY7 KEY6 KEY5 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 KEY0 I/O I I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I O O O O O O O O O O Voltage 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 4 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 9 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 0 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 5 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 6 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 2 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 1 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 5 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 7 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0 Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-17 .3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 8 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 4 0/3.3 V DC Analog 5 V DC power input from MPWB OPWB buzzer signal Ground Power key output Description 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel indicator LED drive signal 1 0/3.

2KJ/2KH 2-3-6 Cassette main PWB (22 ppm model only) YC5 1 1 2 2 1 4 3 8 YC4 1 1 YC2 YC1 YC6 2 3 1 YC8 2 SW1 U2 1 A13 YC3 A1 YC9 YC7 1 7 5 B1 B13 Figure 2-3-6 Cassette main PWB silk-screen diagram 2-3-18 Service Manual Y111000-1 .

cassette paper size width switch and cassette paper size length switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-3-19 .2KJ/2KH Connector YC1 Connected to the paper feeder YC2 Connected to the engine PWB YC3 Connected to the engine PWB and paper feeder Pin No. 1 2 24V PGND Signal I/O O Voltage 24 V DC Ground Description 24 V DC power output to paper feeder 1 2 +24V1 PGND I - 24 V DC - 24 V DC power input from EPWB Ground A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND SDI SDO SCLK SEL0 SEL1 SEL2 RDY RDY SEL2 SEL1 SEL0 SCLK SDO SDI SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND COVOPN SGND SIZEA SIZEB SIZEC SGND SIZED I I I O I I I I O I O O O O I O O O O I I I I 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) Analog 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 0/5 V DC (pulse) 5 V DC 5 V DC 0/24 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC 0/5 V DC Not used Not used 5 V DC power input from EPWB Ground 5 V DC power input from EPWB Ground Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder select signal 0 Paper feeder select signal 1 Paper feeder select signal 2 Paper feeder ready signal Paper feeder ready signal Paper feeder select signal 2 Paper feeder select signal 1 Paper feeder select signal 0 Paper feeder clock signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder Ground 5 V DC power output to paper feeder Not used Not used Ground CLCSSW: On/Off Ground CPWSW: On/Off CPLSW: On/Off CPLSW: On/Off Ground CPLSW: On/Off YC4 Connected to the cassette left cover safety switch.

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 PE 5V NC SGND FEED 5V Signal SGND I/O I O I O 0/5 V DC 5 V DC 0/5 V DC 5 V DC Voltage Ground CPSW: On/Off 5 V DC power output to CPSW Not used Ground CFSW: On/Off 5 V DC power output to CFSW Description 1 2 24V CLT_RE O O 24 V DC 0/24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CPFCL CPFCL: On/Off 1 2 3 4 5 24V MOTA MOTB MOTAMOTB- O O O O O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CDM 0/24 V DC (pulse) CDM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) CDM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) CDM drive control signal 0/24 V DC (pulse) CDM drive control signal 2-3-20 Service Manual Y111000-1 .2KJ/2KH Connector YC5 Connected to the cassette paper switch YC6 Connected to the cassette feed switch YC8 Connected to the cassette paper feed clutch YC9 Connected to the cassette drive motor Pin No.

LEADING FEED PULLEY BYPASS PARTS BYPASS PAD ASSY SP PARTS ROLLER REGIST LEFT SP RIGHT ROLL REGIST ROLLER FEED PULLEY FEED CONTACT GLASS ADF CONTACT GLASS MIRROR A MIRROR B LENS REFLECTOR SCANNER PARTS LAMP SCANNER SP RAIL SCANNER SENSOR ORIGINAL LK-460 ROLLER TRANSFER PLATE STA ELIMINATION DV-460 MC-460 906081L 906082M 906175W 906081L 906082M 906175W AVGR11450N AVGR11449Q AVGR11495U AVGR11496G T. AVGR00569W AVGR08418S AVGR11497C AVGR11498Z NO CODE AVGR11447X AVGR00294W AVGR11451P AVGR05407K AVGR00513F AVGR11453X AVGR11452T Part No. PAPER FEED PULLEY. No. SEPARATION PULLEY. Ref.B. SEPARATION PULLEY.D.2KJ/2KH 2-4 Appendixes Maintenance parts list Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Paper feed pulley Separation pulley Forwarding pulley Cassette paper feed pulley Cassette separation pulley Cassette forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pad Left registration roller Right registration roller Feed roller Feed pulley Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Lens Reflector Exposure lamp Optical rail Original size detection sensor Laser scanner unit Transfer roller Separation electrode Developing unit Main charger unit Fuser unit FK-460 Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley PARTS ROLLER HEAT SP PARTS ROLLER PRESS SP SEPARATOR ASSY PARTS ROLLER EXIT INNER SP PULLEY EXIT PARTS ROLLER FEED SHIFT SP PULLEY FEED SHIFT AVGR11454L AVGR11455Q AVGR11458M AVGR00247V AVGR11499V AVGR11500X AVGR11501Y AVGR00550S Name used in parts list PULLEY. No. Alternative part Fig. Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-4-1 . LEADING FEED PULLEY. PAPER FEED PULLEY.

1-5-22 Feed roller User call Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty.1-5-13 Every service P. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.1-5-13 User call P. P. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found. Page P. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.1-5-6 Separation pulley User call P. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty.1-5-21 Right registration roller Every service P. replace or clean Check.1-5-18 MP separation pad User call P. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. replace or clean Check or replace Check.1-5-6 Cassette paper feed pulley Cassette separation pulley Cassette forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley User call P. replace or clean Check or replace Check or clean Maintenance cycle User call Points and cautions Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty.1-5-3 Forwarding pulley User call P. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.1-5-11 User call P. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.1-5-9 Feed pulley User call 2-4-2 Service Manual Y111000-1 . Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.2KJ/2KH Periodic maintenance procedures Section Maintenance part/location Method Test copy Maintenance cycle Every service Points and cautions Page Test copy Perform at the maxiand test print mum copy size Section Paper feed section Maintenance part/location Paper feed pulley Method Check or replace Check or replace Check or replace Check or replace Check or replace Check or replace Check. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.1-5-18 Left registration roller Every service P. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Replace it if any problem such as flawed or worn state is found.

Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth. Page P. Page P. Check noise and shifting and then apply optical rail grease EM-50LP.1-5-44 Maintenance part/location Drum section Main charger unit Section Method Check or replace Maintenance cycle Every service Points and cautions Replace if an image problem occurs. Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image.2KJ/2KH Section Optical section Maintenance part/location Slit glass Contact glass Mirror 1 Method Clean Clean Clean Maintenance cycle Every service Every service User call Points and cautions Clean with a dry cloth (do not clean with a wet cloth or alcohol). Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image.1-5-35 Optical rail Original size detection sensor Laser scanner unit User call User call User call Section Transfer/ separation section Maintenance part/location Transfer roller Separation electrode Method Clean Check or clean Maintenance cycle User call User call Points and cautions Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth when user call occurs. Clean the slit glass with alcohol and then a dry cloth. Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem.1-5-45 Section Developing section Maintenance part/location Developing unit Method Check or replace Maintenance cycle User call Points and cautions Replace if the problem occurs. Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image. Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the print image. Page Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean User call Lens Clean User call Reflector Clean User call Exposure lamp Check or replace Check or grease Check or clean Check or clean User call Replace if an image problem P.1-5-43 Y111000-1 Service Manual 2-4-3 . Page P. P.1-5-24 occurs or after the exposure lamp does not turn on. Clean with a cleaning brush.

Page Section Other Maintenance part/location Image quality Method Check and adjust Maintenance cycle Every service Points and cautions Page 2-4-4 Service Manual Y111000-1 .1-5-54 Maintenance part/location Eject section Eject roller Section Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Method Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean Check or clean Maintenance cycle User call User call User call User call Points and cautions Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Page P. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Replace if claw is flawed. Page Section Covers Maintenance part/location Covers Original cover Method Clean Clean Maintenance cycle Every service Every service Points and cautions Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. replace or clean Maintenance cycle User call 150K 150K Every service Points and cautions Replace if the problem occurs.2KJ/2KH Section Fuser section Maintenance part/location Fuser unit Heat roller Press roller Heat roller separation claw Method Check or replace Clean Clean Check.1-5-55 P. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty.1-5-49 P. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. Clean it with alcohol if it is dirty. deformed or worn. Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.1-5-47 P. Clean with alcohol.

1-3-12 First paper feeder: select RCL T1 Second paper feeder: select RCL T2 Third paper feeder: select RCL T3 Duplex copying: select RCL DUP Adjusting the leading edge margin (printing adjustment) 7 LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P.1-3-12 6 Adjusting the leading edge registration of the cassettes (printing adjustment) Registration clutch turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 RCL ON U034 test pattern P.1-3-53 Adjusting the left and right margins (printing adjustment) 9 LSU illumination start/end timing U402 AC U402 test pattern P.1-3-13 First paper feeder: select LSU T1 Second paper feeder: select LSU T2 Third paper feeder: select LSU T3 Duplex copying: select LSU DUP 5 Adjusting the leading edge registration of the MP tray (printing adjustment) Registration clutch turning on timing (secondary paper feed start timing) U034 RCL BYP U034 test pattern P.1-3-16 Adjusting the center line of the MP tray (printing adjustment) 3 Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU BYP U034 test pattern P. U053 POLY Mode Original U053 test pattern Page P.1-3-53 Adjusting the trailing edge margin (printing adjustment) 8 LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P.1-3-16 Remarks 1 2 Adjusting the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (printing adjustment) Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN U053 test pattern P.1-3-53 10 Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN ADJ Test chart P.1-3-18 No adjustment for copying using the DP.1-3-13 Adjusting the center line of the cassettes (printing adjustment) 4 Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT U034 test pattern P.2KJ/2KH Chart of image adjustment procedures Adjusting order Item Adjusting the magnification in the main scanning direction (printing adjustment) Image Description Polygon motor speed adjustment Maintenance mode Item No. 2-4-5 .

0% Using DP: ±1.1-3-25 Adjusting the leading edge registration (scanning adjustment) 13 Original scan start timing (image adjustment) U066 U071 ADJUST DATA1 LEAD 1 B MARGIN B MARGIN/ Test chart P. the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the scanner magnification (U065) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) When maintenance item U076 (Adjusting the DP automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N AVGR11211F).0 mm or less Duplex mode: 3.2KJ/2KH Adjusting order Item Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (scanning adjustment) Image Description Original scanning speed Maintenance mode Item No.0 mm or less Duplex mode: 10. U404: For copying originals from the DP.8% Using DP: ±1. Duplex copying (first page): select 2sided front Duplex copying (second page): select 2sided back U066: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. Rotate copying: select ADJUST DATA2 U071: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-54 P.1-3-23 Adjusting the leading edge margin (scanning adjustment) 14 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 Test chart P. U070: For copying originals from the DP.0 mm or less Skewed paper feed Left-right difference Curling 2-4-6 .0 mm or less Simplex mode: 10.5 mm MP tray: ±2.5 mm or less Duplex mode: 2.5% Machine: ±1.5 mm Duplex mode: ±2.0 mm/375 mm Cassette: ±2. When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N AVGR05131K).5 mm Cassette: 1.1-3-55 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. U065 U070 Mode SUB SCAN ADJ CONVEY SPEED 1 Original Test chart Page P.1-3-18 P.5% Machine: ±1.5 mm or less MP tray: 1. Duplex copying: select LEAD 2 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. the following adjustments are automatically made: Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071) Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Image quality Item 100% magnification Enlargement/reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Specifications Machine: ±0. Adjusting the left and right margins (scanning adjustment) 16 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 A MARGIN C MARGIN A MARGIN/ C MARGIN/ Test chart P.5 mm/375 mm Using DP: ±3.0 mm or less Cassette: 2.1-3-55 U403: For copying an original placed on the contact glass. Duplex copying: select CONVEY SPEED 2 U067: For copying an original placed on the contact glass.1-3-20 P.1-3-54 P. U404: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-19 P.0 mm or less MP tray: 2. 11 Adjusting the center line (scanning adjustment) 12 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U067 U072 ADJUST DATA1 1sided Test chart P. U404: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-54 P.1-3-55 Adjusting the trailing edge margin (scanning adjustment) 15 Adjusting the original scan data (image adjustment) U403 U404 D MARGIN D MARGIN/ Test chart P. Rotate copying: select ADJUST DATA2 U072: For copying originals from the DP.1-3-22 Remarks U065: For copying an original placed on the contact glass.

C.G 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC7 YC1 +24V1 A12 1 YC16 6 5 4 7 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +5V4 PGND PGND +24V1 A8 A9 A10 A11 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 YC14 1 +5V 2 -12V 3 LCDUD3 4 LCDUD2 5 LCDUD1 6 LCDUD0 7 LCDCP 8 LCDFLM 9 GND 10 LCDENB 11 GND 12 LCDLP 13 LCDV0 6 5 4 7 3 2 1 8 9 10 YC2 ORGVSYNC DPRDY DPSEL GND SCLK SDO SDI MPWB 6 5 4 7 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 2 4 1 6 5 4 7 3 2 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 2 4 1 Document processor (Option) YC1 2 3 1 4 +5V GND FG +24V KEY0/KEY1 KEY2/KEY3 KEY4/KEY5 KEY6/KEY7 KEY8/KEY9 LED4/LED3 LED2/LED1 LED0/POWERKEY YC15 YC22 SCAN7/SCAN6 SCAN5/SCAN4 SCAN3/SCAN2 SCAN1/SCAN0 +5V/BUZERDRN SGND 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11 SCAN7/SCAN6 SCAN5/SCAN4 SCAN3/SCAN2 SCAN1/SCAN0 +5V/BUZERDRN SGND 5V1 VDOP VDON SAMPLEN OUTPEN SGND PDN YC22 2 GND 1 +24V YC6 BAT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/22 23/24 25/26 27/28 29/30 31/32 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/22 23/24 25/26 27/28 29/30 31/32 YC10 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11 GND/5V CLKOUT/5V GND/MREOUT _HSYNCOUT/GND _VSYNCOUT/_IDOUT GND/GND TXD/_STS _MAIN_STS/FAXDOWN MREIN/GND _VSYNCIN/CLKIN GND/GND _IDIN/_SET _SREQ/_READY RXD/GND _RST/GND _W_UP/+24VSL 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14 15/16 KEY0/KEY1 KEY2/KEY3 KEY4/KEY5 KEY6/KEY7 KEY8/KEY9 LED4/LED3 LED2/LED1 LED0/POWERKEY EGSDI/EGSCLK_BUF GND/EGSDO_BUF EGSBSY/GND EGSDIR/EGSIRN GND/SLEEP PLGCLK/EGOUTPEN GND/PVSYNC _24V_DOWN/GND AFEOVSYNC/ENGHLD SCANHLD/_RST_ENG 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 EGSDO_BUF/EGSCLK_BUF SGND/EGSDI EGSBSY/SGND EGSDIR/EGSIRN SGND/SLEEP PLGCLK/EGOUTPEN SGND/PVSYNC 24VDOWN/SGND AFEOVSYNC/ENGHLD SCANHLD/_RST_ENG +5V4 B1 ORGLSWN B2 SGND B3 12 11 10 1 2 3 1 2 3 OSDS EPWB OPWB +5V4 B4 HPSWN B5 SGND B6 9 8 7 1 2 3 1 2 3 HPSW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 +3.3V +3.3V MDMRDY 3.3V NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +24V GND SS CLK GAIN LD CW DM FTH FH-S FH-M +24V2 PGND DDMREM DDMCLK PGND DDMRDY PGND NC YC12 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 +24V GND SS CLK GAIN LD CW DRM FTS1 FTS2 PSPWB TCDSW 1 1 2 2 YC9 +24V1 KEYCN SGND KEYENBN YC20 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Key Counter (Option) MSW PLSW LIVE COM AC IN INLET LIVE LIVE NC NEUTRAL NEUTRAL 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 COUT1 COUT2 CIN1 CIN2 NC YC8 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 NC SGND TCONDET C1PLSW1N SGND C1PLSW2N C1PLSW3N +5V2PF SGND 1 2 3 4 5 HVTPWB 1 2 3 4 5 YC3 1 2 3 4 5 +3.3V IUID1SCL IUIDSDA SGND IUID1DETN FUMLTN SGND +24V1 DHEATN YC19 +5V4 B7 OPSWN B8 SGND B9 6 5 4 NC B10 3 NC B11 2 NC B12 1 YC14 +5V4 SEPSWN EXTSWN PGND 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 ODSW 32/31 30/29 28/27 26/25 24/23 22/21 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 YC1 32/31 30/29 28/27 26/25 24/23 22/21 20/19 18/17 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 ACSUTN +24V SGND TCROTDET +5V2 YC2 7/6 5/4 3/2 1 YC3 SGND/ERSTN SCK/WRSI WRSO/VPP +3.3V SGND SGND SGND +5V3 1/2 5V/NC 3/4 TG/GND 5/6 RS/GND 7/8 CP/GND PHY2/GND 9/10 GND/Vout1 11/12 Vout2/GND 13/14 NC/CCDPWR 15/16 1/2 3/4 5/6 YC8 +5V +5V +5V GND +3.3V RFSDAT/RFSCLK +24V1/+24V1 FCLTN/REGCLN SGND/BSOLN IPPSWN/BPPESW REGSWN/ICLTN SGND/BPWSW +5V2/TONEPY C1PWSWN/C1PDSWN HMCLK2/HUMID TEMP/HMCLK1 Duplex unit (Option) RSW 1 2 2 1 MPPWSW CPWB PSW 5V PE SGND 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 3 +5V2 2 C1PDSWN 1 SGND YC3 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 PFCL 2 1 1 2 RCL TCS B3 W2 R1 1 2 3 3 SGND 2 TONEPY 1 +5V2 2 1 1 2 2 1 YC7 +24V1 1 FCLTN 2 YC6 +24V1 1 REGCLN 2 YC8 BSOLN 1 +24V1 2 MPSOL 2KJ/2KH 2-4-7 .3V 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 2 2 1 +3.3V IUID2SCL IUIDSDA SGND IUID2DETN +3.3V 13 YC5 YC2 1 2 3 4 YC4 1 SGND 2 RFSDAT 3 RFSCLK 4 +3. N.C.CCDPWB 6/5 24V/24V 4/3 NC/LAMP 2/1 GND/GND 5V/NC TG/GND RS/GND CP/GND PHY2/GND GND/Vout1 Vout2/GND NC/CCDPWR SM INPWB EL B_ A_ B A LAMP N.3V 1 2 3 4 YC4 +5V OUT1 OUT2 GND ESW FSSW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND/5V CLKOUT/5V GND/MREOUT _HSYNCOUT/GND _VSYNCOUT/_IDOUT GND/GND TXD/_STS _MAIN_STS/FAXDOWN MREIN/GND _VSYNCIN/CLKIN GND/GND _IDIN/_SET _SREQ/_READY RXD/GND _RST/GND _W_UP/+24VSL Fax kit (Option) YC2 YC1 5V1 VDOP VDON SAMPLEN OUTPEN SGND PDN Built-in finisher or Job separator (Option) PDPWB APCPWB 1 2 3 3 2 1 +5V1 PDN SGND 3 2 1 1 2 3 +24V1 +24V1 PGND PGND +5V4 SGND UOPSEL UOPSRDY UOPSDO UOPSDI UOPSCLK SLSOLN RLSOLN 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CFM1 OFS B3 W2 R1 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2/1 YC26 LSU PM 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 +5V DBTXD DBRXD NC SGND 1 2 3 4 5 CL 1 2 2 1 R3 B2 G1 2 2 3 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8/A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 PLGCLKN PLGRDYN PLGDRN PLGGND PLG+24V1 FAN1DRN FAN1+24V1 NC/NC TONEGND TONEFULL TONE+5V2 ERASE+24V1 NC ERASE2N ERASE1N THERMAGND THERMA YC24 +24V1 1 TCONTN 2 YC13 LCSSW COMDA COMDB COMDNA COMDNB 1 2 3 4 YC6 YC17 YC1 GND +24V +24V +24V GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 -A A B -B EM FCSSW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +24V +24V +24V1 PGND +24VIL1 +24VIL1 PGND +24VIL2 YC18 YC4 3 3 2 1 2 1 3 LIVE 2 SH 1 MH +24V2 RELAYREM/ZCROSS SHREM/GND MHREM/SLEEP 1 3/2 5/4 7/6 YC2 7 5/6 3/4 1/2 +24V2 RELAYREM/ZCROSS SHREM/SGND MHREM/SLEEP +24V2 PGND MDMREM MDMCLK 3. LAMP 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 YC1 16/15 14/13 12/11 10/9 8/7 6/5 4/3 2/1 Wiring diagram LCDPWB YC5 YC9 1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 YC23 ISMDA ISMDB ISMDNA ISMDNB YC15 YC16 ORGTIMN DOPRDY DOPSEL SGND DOPCLK DOPSDI DOPSDO A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 +24V1/+24V1 NC/LAMPN PGND/PGND YC5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 +5V +5V +5V SGND +3.3V RFSDAT/RFSCLK +24V1/+24V1 FCLTN/REGCLN SGND/BSOLN IPPSWN/BPPESW REGSWN/ICLTN SGND/BPWSW +5V2/TONEPY C1PWSWN/C1PDSWN HMCLK2/HUMID TEMP/HMCLK1 CH 1 2 1 2 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 +5V2PF SGND LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2 LOPSRDY PGND/PGND 10/11 SHVISELN/DHVCLKC 8/9 SHVDRN/MHVDRN 6/7 THVDRN/MHVADJC 4/5 +24V2/THVADJC 2/3 +24V2 1 10/11 8/9 6/7 4/5 2/3 1 GND/GND SHVISELN/HVCLKC SHVDRN/MHVDRN THVDRN/MHVADJC +24V2/THVADJC +24V2 Zener PWB YC10 23 21/22 19/20 17/18 15/16 13/14 11/12 9/10 7/8 5/6 3/4 1/2 YC25 2 2 PGND 1 1 +24V1 16 15 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 YC7 FAN2+24V1 FAN2DRN 1 2 2 1 CFM2 PGND +24V1 +5V2PF SGND 5V2PF SGND LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2 LOPSRDY YC1 23 21/22 19/20 17/18 15/16 13/14 11/12 9/10 7/8 5/6 3/4 1/2 +5V2 1 BPPESW 2 SGND 3 13 12 11 1 3 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 MPPSW 1 2 3 +5V2 IPPSWN SGND +24V1 ICLTN 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 8 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 DUPPCSW DUPFCL +5V2 9 REGSW 10 SGND 11 BPWSW 12 +3.3V +3.3V GND GND GND +5V 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 KMDET/NC KMDREQ/KMACK KMRXD/SGND KMTXD/SGND SGND/SGND +5V/+5V Vdd Vee UD3 UD2 UD1 UD0 CP FLM DISPOFF LOAD V0 VSS F.

2KJ/2KH Paper feeder wiring diagram (22 ppm model only) 16 15 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 PGND +24V1 +5V2PF SGND 5V2PF SGND LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2 LOPSRDY PAPER FEEDER YC2 1 2 1 2 24V PGND YC4 SGND COVOPN SGND SIZEA SIZEB SIZEC SGND SIZED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 2 SGND 1 1 SIZE_A 2 2 SGND 1 1 OPEN CLCSSW CPWSW 4 3 2 1 YC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND SDI SDO SCLK SEL0 SEL1 SEL2 RDY RDY SEL2 SEL1 SEL0 SCLK SDO SDI SGND 5V SGND 5V SGND 5V YC1 4 3 2 1 CHPWB YC3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 YC2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 SIZE_B SIZE_C SGND SIZE_D CPLSW YC5 SGND PE 5V NC 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 3 SGND 2 2 PE 1 1 5V CPSW CMPWB YC6 SGND FEED 5V 1 2 3 1 2 3 3 3 SGND 2 2 FEED 1 1 5V CH CFSW 24V CLT_RE YC8 1 1 2 2 YC9 CPFCL YC1 1 1 2 2 16 15 13 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 24V PGND 24V MOTA MOTB MOTAMOTB- 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 CDM PGND +24V1 +5V2PF SGND 5V2PF SGND LOPSDO LOPSDI LOPSCLK LOPSEL0 LOPSEL1 LOPSEL2 LOPSRDY 2-4-8 .

UPDATING STATUS DATE UPDATED PAGES PAGES CODE 09/2009 1ST EDITION 353 Y111000-1 .